JP2019088546A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve amusement.SOLUTION: As shown in a display screen 721, a game machine displays an image showing a situation of pushing down a push button and a message of "Push" in a presentation display 722. When a presentation using the push button is being performed is explicitly shown in a special symbol variable display game, if an operation of the push button is performed, the operation is accepted as an operation to the presentation display 722, but is not accepted as an operation to an item in a push button mode stocked in an advance notice display indicating that, in a special symbol variable display game corresponding to arbitrary reservation storage, a presentation using the push button is to be performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 87

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  There are gaming machines that give notice of the contents of the effects to be performed in advance.

JP 2004-159760 A

It has not been possible to sufficiently enhance the player's interest until the previewed presentation content is executed.
In one aspect, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine includes display means, operation means, and control means. The display means displays the game. The operation means is capable of receiving a predetermined operation. The control means makes it possible to execute the second operation effect accompanied by the operation of the operation means while executing the reservation effect which carries out the reservation effect which reserves the first operation effect accompanied by the operation of the operation means, and executes the reservation effect and the second operation effect When the operation of the operation means is received, the second operation effect of the first operation effect and the second operation effect is given priority.

  According to one aspect, in the gaming machine, the interest of the game can be improved.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine of a first embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of a game machine of a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the package display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 12 is a second diagram showing a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a third diagram showing a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of probability setting value change processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of probability setting value confirmation processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory map of the game control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of payment command transmission processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of structure of a number-of-wins counter area of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure starting opening 1 switch process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure starting opening 2 switch process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 usual process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 usual process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of the special figure 1 change start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 change start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 change start process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of a variation start information setting process of the first embodiment; FIG. 13 is a second diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start information setting processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability change frequency update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure 1 change of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure 1 change of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing transfer setting processing 1 during special figure 1 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing transfer setting processing 1 during special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing transfer setting processing 2 during a special figure 1 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing transfer setting processing 2 during a special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 1 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 1 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 1 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 2 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 2 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the flow chart of processing under special figure 2 display of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment; FIG. 13 is a second diagram showing the flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command analysis process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an outline of an information disclosure function of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the information disclosure process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting screen of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the collection process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collected data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the tabulation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of total data of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the minimum information amount ensuring in the total data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output information edit process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the in-game disclosed process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of an information disclosure screen of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the information disclosure screen of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting indication aspect of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the non-game in-disclosure process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the in-game disclosed process of the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable display sequence of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production control unit of the fluctuation | variation display of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program of an effect control unit in the first half fluctuation | variation of 2nd Embodiment, and a reference table group. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program of the presentation control unit in the sub production of 2nd Embodiment, and a reference table group. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program in the first half fluctuation | variation execution control of 2nd Embodiment, and a reference table group. It is a figure which shows an example of the control program in the first half fluctuation | variation of 2nd Embodiment, and a table selection pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the control program in the sub rendering of 2nd Embodiment, and a table selection pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the table data of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the first half effect distribution process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal loss process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of PB background change processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of a control program in the first half change corrected in the development process of a 2nd embodiment, and a table selection pattern. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of a control program in the first half change corrected in the development process of a 2nd embodiment, and a table selection pattern. It is a front view (the 1) showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view (the 2) which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the item which appears from the package in 3rd Embodiment, and its content. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the item which appears from the treasure box in 3rd Embodiment, and its content. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure (the 3) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure (the 4) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the contents of an effect performed when a push button is pressed down in the pseudo connection sequence using a push button in a 3rd embodiment, and when not pressing down. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the luggage | load setting process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a modification 1 of a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a modification 1 of a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment displays. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the production in modification 3 of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a modification 3 of a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a modification 3 of a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure (the 3) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a modification 3 of a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol in the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol used in the game state in the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparison in the case where "777" is derived | led-out with the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment, and the case where "777" is derived | led-out with a special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a modification 4 of a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen which the display in a modification 4 of a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows the symbol used in the game state in the modification 5 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparison of two big hit in the modification 5 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows transition of the symbol aspect of the decorative symbol in the variable display game of the modification 6 of 3rd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
First Embodiment
First, a first embodiment will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, lamps, LEDs, etc. are internally incorporated to display decoration or effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, an alarm notification color (for example, A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing) (red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits a sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal contents are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

  In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage tray) 21 for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There is provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state in which the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device. Further, at the upper edge of the upper tray 21, an option setting unit 25 is provided for the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25 a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a decision button switch 25 b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit for the player to set the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting an effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as an determination button switch for determining an effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

  When the selection button switch 25a functions as a production button switch, the gaming machine 10 performs an operation in which the player's operation is performed based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. You can do For example, the effect of the player's operation being intervened is the effect in the variable display game (decorative special view variable display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the gaming machine 10 is a display device The character to be displayed on the screen 41 can be moved, or the identification information in the decorative feature variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

  Further, to the right of the option setting unit 25, the player operates the ball lending button 27, which is operated when the ball lending is received from the adjacent ball lending machine, and to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied with the game balls from the upper plate 21 in the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. Launch towards (see Figure 2). Also, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b can be set, and the brightness of the game board 30 can be set, for example. .

Next, the gaming board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 encloses the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward beyond the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so that it is difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect, etc. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. Further, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for an effect based on the progress of the game is displayed.

  Further, on the upper portion of the center case 40, there is provided a board effect device 44 that effects the game by operating. The panel rendering device 44 is operable toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

  On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common view variation display game. The game ball (the game ball passing through the common drawing start gate 34) winning the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

  Also, two general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general on the lower right side of the center case 40 and the right portion of the special variation winning device 38 described later. The winning opening 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 forming a first start winning opening (start winning area) for giving a start condition of the first special view variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) (Starting opening 1) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a winning opening and the like.
In addition, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the special drawing fluctuation display game (special drawing fluctuation display game) starting condition is provided on the right side of the center case 40 at a position lower than the common drawing start gate 34 A first start winning opening, a start winning area) is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 (starting opening 1) is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right, and this movable member The numeral 37b is normally almost vertical and holds a closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to which the game ball can not flow. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is turned so that the upper end side falls to the right by the common electric solenoid 37c (refer to FIG. 3) as a driving device The game ball can easily change into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be harder to win than in the open state. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary motor vehicle (Puden).

  On the right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, there is formed a flow-off path 91 through which gaming balls can flow, and gaming balls that have not won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 flow downward through the flow-off path 91. A start-up winning opening 92 is provided at a lower portion of the flow-down passage 91, and a guiding portion 93 is provided below the flow-off passage 91. The upper surface 94 of the guiding portion 93 is inclined to the left, and the upper surface 94 receives game balls flowing downward without winning in the start winning hole 92, and the left is a special fluctuation winning device 38 described later. It is designed to guide you.

  The start winning opening 92 is a second starting winning opening (starting winning area) for giving the start condition of the second special view variation display game (special view 2 variation display game), and the start winning opening 92 (start opening 2) The winning game ball is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, at the lower right of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, a special fluctuation winning device (big winning opening) 38 which can be converted into a non-accepting state and an easy-accepting state according to the result of the special view fluctuation display game is arranged. It is set up. The special variation winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 38c, and the opening / closing member 38c is closed as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. In the closed state, the opening / closing member 38 c retracts to convert the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) which can be received. That is, the special variation winning device 38 has a special winning opening (big winning opening) opened and closed by the opening / closing member 38c driven by the special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. And during the big hit game state (the first special game state) by the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the small hit game state (the second special game state) by the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the big winning opening The conversion from the closed state to the open state facilitates the flow of the game ball into the big winning opening, and gives the player a predetermined game value (prize ball). In the inside of the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. .

  In the special variation winning device 38, a plurality of (for example, two) special winning opening switches 38a may be provided. Also, the number of special variation winning devices 38 is not limited to one, and two may be provided. When there are a plurality of special winning openings, one or two of the special winning openings switch 38a may be provided. , And may be provided as a whole (see FIG. 3).

  Further, on the left side of the center case 40, a warp port (warp inlet) 39a is provided. The gaming balls having flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a roll on the stage in the center case 40, and a portion thereof is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp exit 39 b is located immediately above the start winning opening 36, and the gaming ball guided to the warp exit 39 b is likely to win the start winning opening 36.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is the right gaming area It is assumed. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) to start the winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (general winning opening in the right part of the special fluctuation winning device 38 35) can be aimed at winning a prize), by firing the game ball to the right play area (so-called right-handed), winnings to the common drawing start gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the special fluctuation winning device 38, etc. It is possible to aim at

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game and the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 that make up the special view change display game are displayed. A collective display device 50 is provided which displays a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

  The collective display unit 50 includes a round display unit 51 configured of an LED or the like, a special view 1 suspension display unit 52, a special view 1 symbol display unit 53, a special view 2 symbol display unit 54, and a common pattern symbol display unit 55, the common view holding display unit 56, and the state display unit 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

Next, a control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111. Between a central processing unit (CPU) unit 110 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. It consists of data bus 140 grade.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and the operation clock and timer interrupts of the gaming microcomputer 111 and the reference of the random number generation circuit. And an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a clock. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC (Direct Current) 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply device 400. Enabled.

  The power supply device 400 generates an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V, a DC-DC converter that generates lower DC voltage such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC from a voltage of 32 V DC And a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) in the gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying generation and recovery.

  In the first embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, , And may be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the first embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are provided on a substrate different from the power supply 400 or the main substrate. By providing the generation unit 430, it is possible to remove the target from replacement and to reduce the cost.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. Control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by normal power supply unit 410 and detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, to change the power failure monitoring signal and reset signal after a predetermined time. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The setting value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch, and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts the setting key to make it possible to switch between the ON state and the OFF state. The game control apparatus 100 can change the setting relating to the game performance, and the setting stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. For example, the game control apparatus 100 can change the hit probability of the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game according to the six-step setting.

  The game control apparatus 100 shifts the control state to the setting change mode in which setting change of the gaming machine 10 can be performed by turning on the power when the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state. For example, the game control apparatus 100 makes it possible to change settings 1 to 6 cyclically by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability setting value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying the setting value, and is, for example, a 1-digit 7-segment LED and mounted on a substrate.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 shifts the control state to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation of the gaming machine 10 can be performed by turning on the power when the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. . For example, the game control apparatus 100 displays the setting content on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only memory (ROM) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C.

  The ROM 111B stores unchanged information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern random number 3 stored as the start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the special outcome mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state), at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed, This refers to a display state in which the display result derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the fluctuation display areas of left, middle and right (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the following order: "no reach" <"normal reach" <"special 1 reach" <"special 2 reach" <"special 3 reach" <"premier reach". Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device. 10 Control the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (ms)) to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. Have.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one fluctuation pattern table from among a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or small hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, and a probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state Condition), the operation condition (time saving operation condition) of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 as the current gaming condition, the number of starting memories, etc., any one fluctuation pattern table is selected from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables Get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and a payout motor of a payout unit provided to the gaming machine 10 according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Controls to drive out and pay out the winning balls. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10, and performs control for dispensing the ball. .

  In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 1 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the starting opening 2 switch 92a in the starting winning opening 92, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. The proximity I / F 121 also receives a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10. In addition, the proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is incorrectly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as floating and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The winning opening switch 35a will be described. Although the winning opening switch 35a is shown in one block in FIG. 3, a plurality of (N) winning opening switches 35a (three in the present embodiment) are actually included. Is provided on the game board 30, and the respective signals are input to the proximity I / F 121 through different signal lines. In addition, although the special winning opening switch 38a is shown in one block in FIG. 3, a plurality (X pieces) of special winning opening switches 38a (three in this embodiment) are actually provided on the game board 30. It is done. Then, the plurality of big winning opening switches 38a are respectively connected by different signal lines, or, for example, wired OR (not shown) on a relay substrate (not shown) existing between the switches and the game control device 100 (main substrate). It is connected to the game control apparatus 100 by a method called wired OR). The board radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, and may also be connected to the game control apparatus 100 by a method called wired OR.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switches 36a and 37a, the start opening 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are the second input port 123 Input to In addition, about the output (output from proximity I / F 121) of the signal of starting opening 1 switch 36a, 37a which is the starting opening switch of the special figure 1, although it is shown by one signal line in FIG. There are two.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124. In addition, the third input port 124 is a detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and a glass frame opening detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. 63 detection signals, a detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal of the setting value change switch 126, a detection signal of the setting key switch 127, RAM initial A detection signal of the switch 112 is input.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control apparatus 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start opening 2 switch 92a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. There is.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 asserts an enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown) to a valid level by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. Change) can be read out. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave improper signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of radio waves by a frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device). A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that the game ball is stored in the lower tray 23 by a predetermined amount or more (full)), a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) Signal), out ball detection switch signal (signal output when out ball is detected) is taken in through the data bus 140 The first input port 122 is provided for supplying the emissions 111.

  The out ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out sensor each time an out sensor (not shown) detects one out ball of the gaming machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in a discharge flow path (not shown) between a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball (out ball) from the gaming machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out sphere detection switch signal is used to calculate gaming performance (for example, base) per predetermined operation (for example, 60,000 out spheres), and the calculated gaming performance is displayed on the state display device 135. The out-of-sphere detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300. In that case, the out-of-sphere detection switch signal may be used for determination of an operating state that is a trigger for switching to a game effect or a customer waiting screen display. For example, the status display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display gaming performance by decimal number or hexadecimal number.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration, and a detection signal of the vibration sensor switch may be input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. It has a function to remove noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are temporarily input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay substrate 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test emission test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay substrate 70 for output to the test emission test device. It is configured to In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the direct shot testing device via the relay substrate 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent the malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is one-way communication in which a signal can not be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying special design symbol information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a notable authorized organization not shown via a relay board 70 An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied as they are to the test shooting test device as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The error signal indicating that control can not be performed is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial shot test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay substrate 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus It is supposed to be.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and opens / closes data of the big winning opening solenoid 38 b which opens / closes the opening / closing member 38 c of the special variation winning device 38 (big winning opening) The first output port 134a for outputting the open / close data of the common voltage solenoid 37c for opening / closing the signal and the display data of the state display device 135 is provided. In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134 b for outputting display data of the probability setting value display device 136. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 134 c for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 134d is provided to output on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 134 e for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. Can be supplied to an external device via a photorelay. Note that part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. The fifth output port 134e also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives an open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the common power solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal 138a. A second driver 138b for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 134c; and a current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 134d. An external information signal supplied to an external device such as a management apparatus from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 134e and the fourth output port 134d for outputting the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side to the external information terminal board 71 Display of the fourth driver 138d for outputting, and the display of the state display device 135 outputted from the first output port 134a Fifth driver 138e is provided for receiving a data signal to generate a drive signal for status display device 135 outputs.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12 V or 5 V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the main board of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the main board. In addition, the state display device 135 or the fifth driver 138e and the state display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, not on the main board but on the external board (not shown) side. .

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 490. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 490 by serial communication. Since such data transmission and reception are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies, sound effects and the like from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 can be a PROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and holding stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of a power failure. An FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 serving as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM 311 a for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes a command (rendering command) from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, and the decoration lamp Processing such as lighting, motor drive control of a motor or a solenoid, management of presentation time, etc.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition, the VDP 312 is connected to an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. It is done.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The voiced sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (a light emitting diode) or the like provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40), a glass frame 15 A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the board, a board provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the effect device 44 (for example, movable objects that cooperate with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect, etc.). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling this frame effect device is provided. Good.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and the effect role switch for detecting the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. 47 (the function of detecting the on / off state of the effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and detecting the state of the volume adjustment switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 for main control A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting a detection signal to the microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Also, it is supplied from the main control microcomputer 311 to the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 and the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps and motors. And reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board that constitutes the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 extracts the random determination value for hit determination of the common drawing based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34 The game is compared with the judgment value stored in the table to determine the hit-off of the common-pattern variation display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the regular symbol display portion 55 of the batch display device 50, processing is performed to display a general view variation display game to be stopped and displayed. If the result of this common view variation display game is a hit, while displaying the special result aspect corresponding to each of the first stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol on the common symbol symbol display section 55, the common current solenoid 37c Is controlled to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 functions as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the common drawing symbol display unit 55.

  Also, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36 and the starting opening 1 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, the starting winning combination (starting memory) is stored Based on the starting memory, a process for determining the hit of the first special figure fluctuation display game by extracting the big hit judgment random number value of the first special figure fluctuation display game and comparing it with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B. Do. In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 92a provided in the starting winning opening 92 stores the starting memory, based on the starting memory, the second special view fluctuation display for big hit judgment disturbance A numerical value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit of the second special figure variation display game.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs control signals (rendering control command, rendition command) including the determination results of the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game to the presentation control device 300. Do. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, processing for displaying the special view variation display game Do. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variation display game based on the winnings in the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the starting winning opening 92) of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32. Make a game control means.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the effect state, the output of the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 has a special result aspect or a small hit result aspect in the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54. While displaying the special game state and the small hit game state (that is, the process of executing the special game and the small hit game). In the processing for generating the special gaming state due to the result of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game becoming a big hit, the CPU 111A is, for example, the special fluctuation winning device 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b. The opening and closing member 38c is opened to perform control to allow the game ball to flow into the big winning opening. In this special game state, the CPU 111A, for example, has a condition that either a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls win in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from opening the special winning opening. One round is to open the special winning opening until it is achieved, and control (cycle game) to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds is performed. In addition, a small hit game state is generated as a result of the first special view change display game (special view 1 change display game) or the second special view change display game (special view 2 change display game) becoming a small hit. In the process, the CPU 111A performs, for example, control to open the opening / closing member 38c of the special variation winning device 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b, and to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening.

  The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the special winning opening performed in the small hit gaming state is such that an operation of maintaining the opening / closing member in the open state is performed four times at intervals of 1500 ms, for example, for 200 ms. As described above, the game control device 100 functions as a special winning opening / closing control unit that performs control to open / close the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, the CPU 111A performs control to display the result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50.

  Further, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control apparatus 100 can generate the high probability state as the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Also, the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view game, regardless of which special view fluctuation display game of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game is a high probability state. Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (specific gaming state, common figure high probability state) as a gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. In this short time state, the probability (common drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the present embodiment, the drawing probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the common view variation display game (general view change time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the common view stop time for displaying the result of the common view change display game is, for example, 600 ms. When the game variation display game hits and results in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 being released, the opening time (the time for general electric power release) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, The opening time of the second stop symbol (general power opening time) and the number of times open (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the third opening time of the stop symbol (general time open time) and the number of openings (for example, 1700 ms × It can be set to be 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set so as to control the common drawing fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (E.g., 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability of becoming a hit result of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing probability) is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a probability (generally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of common power release, the common power open time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In addition, either of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected in the case of a hit. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated. The short time state can also be referred to as a general power support state (during general power support or during power support).

  Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes seven segments of LED_d1 and seven segments of LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18. The collective display device 50 displays various states according to the lighting mode of the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2 and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18.

  The batch display device 50 distributes the various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2 and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, whereby the round display unit 51, the special view 1 suspension display unit 52, and the special view 1 symbol display unit 53 And a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, a common figure symbol display unit 55, a common drawing reserve display unit 56, a state display unit 57, and a special figure 2 reserve display unit 58. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special view game by lighting modes of the four LEDs of LED_d3 to LED_d6. The special view 1 suspension display unit 52 displays the number of reservations in the special view 1 game by the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game by lighting modes of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of seven segments LED_d1. Special figure 2 symbol indicatory department 54 indicates the design in the special figure 2 game with the lighting feature of 8 LED (7 segment LED and 1 dot LED) of 7 segments LED d2. The common-design symbol display unit 55 displays the symbols in the common-play game by lighting modes of the three LEDs of LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The common drawing reservation display unit 56 displays the number of reservations in the common drawing game by lighting modes of the two LEDs of LED_d15 and LED_d16. The state display unit 57 displays the gaming state in the special view game by the lighting mode of the three LEDs of LED_d7, LED_d9, and LED_d17. The special view 2 suspension display unit 58 displays the number of reservations in the special view 2 game by lighting modes of two LEDs of LED_d13 and LED_d14.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main processing shown in FIGS. 6 to 8 and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. The main processing is processing executed by the game control unit (CPU 111A).

  The main process is started by turning on the power. In the main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, after the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed first, the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc. when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order. In step S4, 00h at the top of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

  Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to the prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for the program to start properly is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer counts time using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of validity determination (check sum calculation) of data held in the RAM region. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the third input port 124, and the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is performed by reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, when the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting of the standby time or the RAM initialization switch is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations, and the operation of initialization performed at the time of turning on the power It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  In addition, the detection signal of the setting value change switch 126 and the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 are input to the third input port 124, and the state of the third input port 124 is set before the start of the standby time. By reading, the operations of the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 can be detected reliably. That is, when the states of the setting value changing switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 are read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting value changing switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 are operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting value changing switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 from when the standby time elapses. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the setting change operation performed at the time of the power on or It is possible to prevent such a situation that the setting confirmation operation can not be accepted.

  Next, after performing processing (step S7) for setting a power on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds), processing for monitoring standby time and monitoring occurrence of power failure during standby time (steps S8 to S12) Do. First, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S8), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on or not A determination is made (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine 10 to be shut off. . As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. be able to.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure occurs, the power on delay timer is updated by “−1” (step S11), and the timer value is “0”. It is determined whether it is "" (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of the read / write readable RWM (Read Write Memory) such as the RAM 111C or EEPROM is given (step S13) The off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this first embodiment) is set (step S15). It is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S16).

  Then, if the value of the blackout inspection area 1 is normal (step S16; Y), it is determined whether the value of the blackout inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal blackout inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). (Step S17) If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (Step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process (Step S18) is performed to calculate a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM.

  In the checksum calculation process, the sum of the data for the game control work area and the data for the state display work area may be calculated as a checksum, or the data for the game control work area and the state display work The checksum may be separately calculated from the data of the area, or may be calculated only from the data of the game control work area. The game control work area is a work area used for game control among the storage areas in the RWM. The work area for state display is a work area used for state display among storage areas in the RWM.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S18 matches the checksum at power-off (step S19). If the checksums match (Y in step S19), the beginning of the RAM clear The RAM clear start address 2 is set as the address (step S20). The RAM clear top address 2 is an address for which the probability setting value is not to be cleared.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed from the state of the third input port 124 (step S21). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S50 (see FIG. 8). If the probability setting value is not being changed (step S21; N), the process proceeds to step S22.

  Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the body frame (front frame) 12 is in the open state (step S22). If the main body frame 12 is in the open state (step S22; Y), the process proceeds to step S23. If the main body frame 12 is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24.

  Next, from the state of the third input port 124, it is determined whether the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S23). If the setting key switch 127 is on (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S50, and if the setting key switch 127 is not on (step S23; N), the process proceeds to step S24.

  Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24). If the set value change switch 126 is ON (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S56, and if the set value change switch 126 is not ON (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S25.

  Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step S25). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step S25; Y), the process proceeds to step S59, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step S25; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7) Perform processing when normal recovery from a power failure occurs.

  If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or if it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S19; N), step The process moves to S46 and guides the user to clear the RAM by changing the setting.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step S26, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S26), and the status shown by the special view status (data set in the special view status area described later) It is determined whether or not the special figure game is in high probability with reference to step S27). Then, when the special figure game is in high probability (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S28, and when the special figure game is not in high probability (step S27; N), the process proceeds to step S30.

  If the special view game is in high probability, the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S28), and the on data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area (step S29).

Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game process number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31.
Here, the area to be initialized in step S26 is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area relating to error fraud monitoring. In step S26, the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is determined. It is in an undetermined state indicating that there is no. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined.

  In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, and a screen designation command. Send Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the information on the number of effects and the information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. In addition, with the command of screen specification, the control state of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are usually processed (during fluctuation, big hit (first special game state), small hit (first 2) A command for instructing display of a customer waiting demo screen if none of them is a special gaming state), and a command for instructing display of a recovery screen otherwise.

  In step S31, processing for activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a pattern that determines how to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition) is there. By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and to improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the first embodiment, big hit symbol initial value random numbers, small After saving in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) of a winning symbol initial value random number, a hitting initial value random number, a hitting symbol initial value random number) (step S33), an interrupt is permitted (step S34).

  Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of random number (big hit symbol random number) that determines big hit stop symbol of special figure, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is small hit stop of special figure It is a random number which becomes an initial value of a random number (small hitting symbol random number) which determines a symbol. In addition, "the initial value random number per hit" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (random number per hit) that determines the hit in the common pattern change game, and "the initial symbol random number random" determines the per character in the common pattern change game It is a random number that is an initial value of a random number (per symbol random number). In addition, small hit design random numbers do not exist in models without small hits, and there may be cases in which a hit initial symbol random number does not exist depending on the model.

  The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. By setting it as the start value), it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, initial value random number update processing (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number updating process is a process of updating (initially incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, “+1”. As described above, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuously updating the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main processing.

  Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the hit symbol random number is a random number generated by the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as timer interrupt processing which is a processing unit. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value change method to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by “+1” or “−1”, or may be a random type update in which all values within the range appear separately without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step S35, the number of times (for example, 2) for checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and the data bus and checking is set (step S36) It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check (loop process) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method in which the initial value random number update processing is performed also in the timer interrupt processing in the above-described step S35 of the initial value random number update processing. In order to avoid the execution of the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. As in the embodiment, when the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that the main processing is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step S39) A process (step S40) of outputting the off data to the output port is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S41), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S42). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum at the time of power interruption of the RWM, and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum in a checksum area, access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be determined at the time of reinjection.

  Next, when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or when it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S19; N), The guidance of the RAM clear by the setting change performed after step S46 will be described.

  In the case of guiding the RAM clear by the setting change, the RAM clear top address 1 is set as the top address when the RAM is cleared (step S46). The RAM clear top address 1 is the top address of the game control area. The RAM clear top address 1 is an address for designating all of the game control work area and the game control stack area as the clear target.

  Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the body frame (front frame) 12 is in the open state (step S47). When the body frame 12 is in the open state (step S47; Y), the process proceeds to step S48, and when the body frame 12 is not in the open state (step S47; N), the process proceeds to step S49.

  Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S48). If the setting key switch 127 is on (step S48; Y), the process proceeds to step S50, and if the setting key switch 127 is not on (step S48; N), the process proceeds to step S49.

  In step S49, by transmitting a command of setting change instruction to the effect control board (effect control device 300), guidance of RAM clear by setting change is performed via the effect control device 300. For example, the gaming machine 10 performs guidance of RAM clear by setting change by guidance display by the display device 41 and guidance sound (including voice) output by the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The gaming machine 10 performs a process of prohibiting access to the RAM without saving check data in the power failure inspection area after guiding the RAM clear by the setting change, and then the power of the gaming machine is changed. Wait to be shut off. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the setting value from being initialized at a timing not intended by the administrator by prompting the setting change prior to the initialization when the data is abnormal.

  Next, when it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed (step S21; Y) or when it is determined that the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S23; Y, step S48; Y), The process regarding the probability setting value change performed after S50 is demonstrated.

  In the processing related to the probability setting value change, the data of the clear target area (game control work area) in the storage area (the area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, the RAM 111C) is zero cleared (step S50). The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be converted (step S51). The initial value saved in step S51 includes information (for example, a timer value) for outputting a security signal after the start of the setting value change. The security signal may be output only for a predetermined time, or may be continuously output during the change of the setting value.

  Further, the probability setting value changing flag is set (step S52). The probability setting value changing flag indicates that the probability setting value is being changed in the set state, and indicates that the probability setting value is not being changed in the reset state.

  Further, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S53), and the value of the probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the operation probability setting value area (step S54). ).

  Furthermore, by transmitting a command (for example, a command under (probability setting) change) to the effect control board to the effect control board (effect control device 300), it is sent to the effect control device 300 that the probability setting is being changed. It notifies (step S55). When the process related to the probability setting value change up to step S55 is executed, the process proceeds to step S31.

  Next, when the setting value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24; Y), a process related to the RAM initialization performed in step S56 and subsequent steps will be described. In the process related to the RAM initialization, the RAM clear top address 2 is set as the top address when the RAM is cleared (step S56). The RAM clear start address 2 is an address that excludes the probability setting value area from the clear target.

  Furthermore, the data of the clear target area (work control area for game control) in the storage area (for example, the area not including the access prohibited area) of RWM (for example, RAM 111C) is zero cleared (step S57). The initial value at the time of conversion is saved (step S58).

  Furthermore, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S59), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S59, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, a command for RAM initialization (waiting customer demo screen , And transmits a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying of the RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the information on the number of effects and the information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. And the like), the main control means is a standby means (game control for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device by delaying the activation of the main control means when the power is turned on). The apparatus 100) and the power failure monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of the power failure in the predetermined standby time are provided.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) operates the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operating unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of external operation, and the initialization operation unit. Based on the above, initialization means (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the waiting time.

  In addition, the game control apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment divides the process of initialization at the time of data abnormality (first initialization process) and the process of initialization at the time of initialization operation (second initialization process) Since the functions (first initialization means, second initialization means) to be separately executed are included, it is possible to realize optimum and waste-free initialization processing according to the situation.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is operated by the RAM 111C capable of storing data, a setting operation unit (setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127) which can be operated from the outside, and the setting operation unit Setting change means (the game control apparatus 100) for changing the setting value stored in the RAM 111C based on the information stored in the memory 111C, enabling the setting change and providing the setting display unit (probability setting value display device 136) This allows you to check the settings (settings).

Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing of the game control apparatus 100 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process which occurs in the above-described main process from the time when the interrupt permission is issued until the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39). The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S61). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S62). In step S62, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, the input from various sensors and switches and the taking in of signals, that is, the input processing (step S63) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S64) is performed to control the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, common electric solenoid 37c). Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal of the firing permission is output by performing the output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating a state of release permission as viewed from the game control device 100, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating a state of release permission as viewed from the payout control device 200. Are also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when the two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are allowed to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, random number update processing 1 (step S65) and random number update processing 2 (step S66) are performed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the hit symbol random number which is the target of the initial value random number update processing. . Further, the random number updating process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In addition to the random number update process 1 or the random number update process 1, the random number update process 2 may stop the random number update during the setting change or change the update cycle.

  After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from the start opening 1 switches 36a, 37a, the start opening 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a of the common drawing, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 38a A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S67) is performed to perform monitoring (whether or not the front frame or the glass frame is opened). Further, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step S68) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switches 36a, 37a and the starting opening 2 switch 92a. In the start opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the start winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 which makes the first start winning opening, or the starting winning opening 92 which makes the second start winning opening, various random numbers (The big hit random number etc) is extracted, the game result prior decision which decides the game result based on the particular prize beforehand in the stage before the start of the special figure fluctuation indicatory game is done.

  Next, in step S69, probability setting value change processing relating to the change of the probability setting value is performed. In step S70, the probability setting value changing flag is referenced to determine whether or not the probability setting value is being changed, and when the probability setting value is being changed (step S70; Y), the process proceeds to step S75 to set the probability. If the value is not being changed (step S70; N), the process proceeds to step S71. In step S71, it refers to the probability setting value confirmation mode flag to determine whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress, and proceeds to step S75 if the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S71; Y) If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S71; N), the process proceeds to step S72. Note that the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is a flag that is set or reset in probability setting value confirmation processing described later.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S72) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (step S72a). A special figure 2 game process (step S73b) for carrying out a process relating to the special figure 2 variable display game, and a drawing figure game process (step S74) for carrying out a processing relating to the common drawing fluctuation display game.

  Next, the desired content of a segment LED (for example, an LED such as the special view 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50) provided in the gaming machine 10 and displaying various information related to the display of special view variation display game and game. The segment LED editing process (step S75) which is driven to display the mark, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S76) performing the process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determining whether there is an abnormality The board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S77) is performed to check the detection signal of to determine whether there is an abnormality. Then, external information editing processing (step S78) for setting signals output to various external devices to the output buffer (step S78) and status display editing output processing for status display (step S79) are performed, and the timer interrupt processing ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) are interrupts. It is performed automatically at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S64) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of output processing of the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off data is output (reset) to a segment output port (third output port 134c) for outputting segment data of the batch display device 50 (step S81). Next, data to be output is synthesized and output to the solenoid output port (first output port 134a) for outputting data of the general-purpose solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b (step S82).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device 50 is updated by "+1" in the range of "0" to "3" (step S83), and the LED digit corresponding to the value of the digit counter The output data of the line is acquired (step S84). Here, as an example of turning on the LED_d1 to the LED_d18 of the collective display device 50 dynamically, a round display, a special view 1 reserve display, a special figure 1 symbol display, a special figure 2 symbol display, a common figure symbol display, a common view reserve display, and There is a state display (playing state display such as time saving state or high probability state).

  Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S85), and the combined data is output to the digit / external information output port (fourth output port 134d) for digit output and external information output (step S86). ). The external information synthesized in step S85 is "door / frame open" and "security signal".

  Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S87), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port (third output port 134c) for segment output (third output port 134c). Step S88).

  Subsequently, various output data of the external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S89). Here, as external information to be synthesized, "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "design fixed number signal", "start opening signal", "main prize ball" Signal etc. Next, the synthesized data and the output data of the emission permission are synthesized (step S90), and the synthesized data is used for external information output and emission permission signal output, external information / emission permission signal output port (fifth output port 134e) Output (step S91).

  Next, off output data of probability setting value display is set. That is, the off data is output (reset) to the probability setting value display output port (second output port 134b) for outputting the probability setting value display data of the probability setting value display device 136 (step S92).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S93). If the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S93; Y), the process proceeds to step S94. If the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (step S93; N), the process proceeds to step S95.

If the probability setting value display permission flag is set, probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is loaded from the setting value display data area in the RWM (step S94).
In step S95, the probability setting value display data is output to the probability setting value display output port (second output port 134b).

  Next, data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S96). Thereafter, data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S97).

  Next, the data output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S98). Furthermore, the data output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shooting tester is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 ( Step S99). Then, the data output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 ( Step S9a) is performed.

  Next, test signal output data of the probability setting value is loaded (step S9b). Although the test signal output data loads probability setting value display data (for example, 7 segment data) corresponding to the probability setting value from the setting value display data area in the RWM, the probability setting value can be confirmed. If it is, it may be a probability setting value (for example, a numerical value of 1 to 6) or other types of data.

  Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S9c). If the setting key switch 127 is ON (step S9c; Y), the process proceeds to step S9d, and if the setting key switch 127 is not ON (step S9c; N), the process proceeds to step S9e.

When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state, the test signal output data of the loaded probability setting value and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S9 d).
In step S9e, the combined data is output to the test signal output port 6 on the relay substrate 70, and the output processing is completed.

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S67) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing of the first embodiment. In the winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, the probability setting value changing flag is referred to, and it is determined whether the probability setting value is changing (step S101). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S101; Y), the process proceeds to step S109. If the probability setting value is not being changed (step S101; N), the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the probability setting value confirmation mode in progress flag is referenced to determine whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress, and if the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S102; Y), the process proceeds to step S109. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S102; N), the process proceeds to step S103.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, a port number to which a detection signal from the counting switch is input) corresponding to the special winning opening switch 38a (count switch) in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) Data indicating the bit position etc. in the port of the signal is stored (step S103). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S104) is executed to monitor whether there is an injustice (illegal prize) for winning in the big prize mouth despite the fact that the big prize mouth is not open. .

  After that, prepare the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 37a) in the general public (step S105), and monitor the illegal winnings and detect the normal winnings and fraud & winnings monitoring process ( Step S106) is performed.

  Next, the winning opening monitoring of the winning opening switch that does not require the fraud monitoring processing, that is, the winning opening switch that can always be winning (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) A table is prepared (step S107), and a winning number counter updating process (step S108) for updating the winning number is performed.

  Next, the value of the state scan counter for designating in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals to monitor the error state of the gaming machine 10 is to be the target of this monitoring is "0". To "3" (step S109). Thereafter, according to the value of the state scan counter, any of the switch abnormality 1 error output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection of the switch, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch and the dispensing abnormality error. A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared for setting a target of error monitoring based on the parameter (step S110). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S111) is performed to determine whether an error has occurred.

  Next, according to the value of the status scan counter, prepare the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the monitoring of the error based on the glass frame open, the main body frame open, the frame radio wave fraud and the touch switch. (Step S112). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S113) is performed to determine whether an error has occurred.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S114). If the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S114; N), the winning opening switch / status monitor End the process. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine status on the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. In addition, when the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S114; Y), the gaming machine status based on the switch abnormality 2 error which is output by the occurrence of connector disconnection of the switch or the like according to the value of the status scan counter. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the target is prepared (step S115). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S116) is performed to determine whether an error has occurred, a payout busy signal check process (step S117) is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. The payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is performed once every four times, and since the remaining three times are passed, monitoring of a cycle of 16 ms is performed.

Probability setting value change processing
Next, the details of the probability setting value changing process (step S69) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of probability setting value change processing according to the first embodiment.

  First, with reference to the probability setting value changing flag, it is determined whether the probability setting value is changing (step S121). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S121; Y), the process proceeds to step S123. If the probability setting value is not being changed (step S121; N), the process proceeds to step S122 to execute the probability setting value confirmation process (step S122). After that, the probability setting value change processing ends. The details of the probability setting value confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the probability setting value is being changed, the probability setting value extinguishing timer is updated. Specifically, the value of the probability setting value extinguishing timer is referred to, and when the value of the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not "0", it is decremented by "1" to update the value of the probability setting value extinguishing timer (step S123). .

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability setting value extinguishing timer is “0” (step S124), and when the value of the probability setting value extinguishing timer is “0” (step S124; Y), step S125. If the value of the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not "0" (step S124; N), the process proceeds to step S126.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value has been changed with reference to the probability setting value changed flag (step S126). If the probability setting value has been changed, the process proceeds to step S127, and the probability setting value has not been changed. Proceed to step S133. The probability setting value changed flag is a flag that is set when there is a change in the probability setting value (determination operation of the probability setting value).

  If the probability setting value has been changed (step S126; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127). When the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127; Y), processing relating to RAM initialization after changing the probability setting value is performed in step S128 and after. When the setting key switch 127 is not in the OFF state (step S127; N) ) Ends the probability setting value change process.

  Next, when the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127; Y), a process related to RAM initialization performed in step S128 and subsequent steps will be described. In the process related to the RAM initialization, the RAM clear top address 3 is set as the top address when the RAM is cleared (step S128). The RAM clear top address 3 is an address that excludes the probability setting value area, the variation pattern random number area (random numbers updated in the random number update processing 2), and the initial value random number area as the clear target. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can effectively use the random number stirring during the setting change. The RAM clear start address 3 may exclude the probability setting value area from the clear target, and may be an address to include the variation pattern random number area and the initial value random number area in the clear target.

  Next, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to zero (step S129), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S130). The initial value saved in step S130 includes information (for example, a timer value) for outputting a security signal. The security signal may be output only for a predetermined time, or may be continuously output during the change of the setting value.

  Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S131). Note that by including information related to setting change (for example, probability setting value display data etc.) in the target of the RAM clear, the probability setting value after changing the probability setting value and the information related to setting change before changing the probability setting value Wrinkle prevention is planned.

  Further, a command for ending the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S132), and the process proceeds to step S34 (see FIG. 7) of the main processing. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S132, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, a probability setting change end command (customer waiting demo While displaying the screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying the initialization of the RAM with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the information on the number of effects and the information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. In addition, in addition to the notification of completion of the probability setting change, or in place of the notification of the completion of the probability setting change, the command of the probability setting change end may also serve as the RAM clear notification. In addition, in step S132, a RAM initialization command may be transmitted in addition to the probability setting change end command or in place of the probability setting change end command.

  If the probability setting value has not been changed (step S126; N), the processing of step S133 and thereafter is performed. In step S133, it is determined whether there is an input from the setting value change switch 126 (step S133). If there is an input from the set value change switch 126, the process proceeds to step S134, and if there is no input from the set value change switch 126 (step S133; N), the process proceeds to step S137.

  When there is an input from the setting value change switch 126 (step S133; Y), the value of the operation probability setting value area (operation probability setting value) is incremented by “1”, and the range of “0” to “5” Update cyclically (step S134). Although the work probability setting value is set to six levels from “0” to “5”, it is not limited thereto, and may be three stages, ten stages, or the like as long as it corresponds to the probability setting value. The work probability setting value corresponds to the probability setting value on a one-to-one basis, but may have a one-to-many correspondence with the probability setting value. For example, when the probability setting value is in three steps of “0” to “2”, the working probability setting value is made in six steps of “0” to “5”, and the probability setting value “0”, “1”, “ The operation probability setting values “0, 1”, “2, 3”, and “4, 5” may be associated with each of “2”.

  Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the operation probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S135), and the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinguishing timer area (step S136). The probability setting value extinguishing timer area is an area for providing the probability setting value display device 136 with a blank display. Thus, the probability setting value display device 136 can perform blank display each time there is a setting value changing operation (input from the setting value changing switch 126).

  Next, in step S137, it is determined whether or not the setting value change confirmation operation is performed. For example, the confirmation operation of the setting value change can be a touch switch signal. The setting value change determination operation may use an input different from the touch switch signal, or an input signal may be used from a dedicated operation switch provided separately, or an input from two or more switches A signal combination or the like may be used. If there is an operation for confirming the setting value change, the process proceeds to step S138, and if there is no operation for confirming the setting value change (step S137; N), the probability setting value changing process is ended.

  If there is an operation to confirm the setting value change (step S137; Y), the value of the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S138), and the probability setting value display corresponding to the probability setting value is displayed. The data is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S139), and the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S140).

  Further, a command for changing the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (the effect control device 300) (step S141), and the probability setting value changing process is ended. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S141, a command for changing the probability setting value (for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and notifying of the probability setting value change with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is performed. In addition to the command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, and a probability setting value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, presentation number information or high probability number information may be transmitted.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
Next, the details of the probability setting value confirmation process (step S122) in the above-described probability setting value changing process will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of probability setting value confirmation processing according to the first embodiment.

  In step S151, the probability setting value confirmation mode in progress flag is referenced to determine whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S151; Y), the process proceeds to step S159. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S152.

  If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S151; N), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S152), and it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S153). The process proceeds to S154, and when the game is in progress (step S153; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. The term "during game" refers to a gaming state in which the player is likely to be playing has a high probability of being in a game, such as, for example, during a special figure change, a common drawing change, a special drawing middle, a common drawing middle, and so on. In addition, during the game may include a gaming state in which there is a special drawing 1 holding number or a special drawing 2 holding number.

  When the game is not in progress (step S153; N), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S154). If the setting key switch 127 is in the on state, the process proceeds to step S155, and if the setting key switch 127 is not in the on state (step S154; N), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended.

  When setting key switch 127 is ON (step S154; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is set (step S155), and the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S156). The initial value is saved in the area (step S157). By saving the initial value in the security signal control timer area, the security signal is output for the probability setting value display time set as the initial value. The security signal is not limited to the probability setting value display time set as the initial value, but may be continuously output during the probability setting value confirmation mode.

  Further, a command for confirming the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (the effect control device 300) (step S158), and the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S158, a command for confirming the probability setting value (displaying a customer waiting demonstration screen and displaying notification of the probability setting value confirmation with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is performed. In addition to the command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, and a probability setting value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, presentation number information or high probability number information may be transmitted.

  When in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S151; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S159). If the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S160. If the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S159; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended.

  When the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S159; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is cleared (step S160), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S161).

  Further, a command for ending the probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (the effect control device 300) (step S162), and the probability setting value confirmation process is ended. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S162, a command for ending probability setting value confirmation (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying notification of probability setting value confirmation with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is performed. In addition to the above commands, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, and a probability setting value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, presentation number information or high probability number information may be transmitted.

  Next, the memory map of the RAM 111C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a view showing an example of a memory map of the game control device of the first embodiment. The memory map 111M is a memory map of the RAM 111C. The RAM 111C sets a game control work area, a game control stack area, a state display work area, and a state display stack area in order from the top of the memory. Further, the RAM 111C clearly separates the game control stack area and the state display work area by setting an unused area of 16 bytes or more between the game control stack area and the state display work area. The RAM 111C sets an unused area after the state display stack area, but may set the state display stack area so as to include the end of the memory without providing the unused area. In addition, the RAM 111C may set an unused area between the gaming control work area and the gaming control stack area, or between the status display work area and the status display stack area.

  Since the game control work area arranges the probability setting value area at the top, the RAM clear top address 1 is set to clear all the game control work areas (game control work areas) and the game control stack area. Do. In addition, the RAM clear top address 2 clears the game control work area excluding the probability setting value area and the game control stack area. Further, the RAM clear top address 3 is a target for clearing the game control work area and the game control stack area excluding the probability setting value area, the variation pattern random number area, and the initial value random area. Further, all of the RAM clear top address 1, the RAM clear top address 2 and the RAM clear top address 3 are targeted for clearing the area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the power failure inspection area 2 and the checksum area.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of payout command transmission processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 16 is a view showing an example of the structure of the winning number counter area according to the first embodiment.

  First, an example of the number-of-winnings counter region will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, for example, the number-of-winnings counter region 1 comprises three prize ball counters, ten prize ball counters, and 14 prize ball counters. The winning counter can be stored up to 65535 winnings. Next, as shown in FIG. 16, for example, the winning number counter area 2 comprises three winning ball counters, ten winning ball counters, and 14 winning ball counters, and each winning number counter can store up to 255 winnings. It has become. In the check of the count number of the winning number counter area, the address of the winning number counter area is updated in step S202 and the like described later to check the above counters in order from the top (from the three winning ball counter).

Next, in FIG. 15, the left column is processing for updating (increasing) the number of times of output of the main winning ball signal, and the right column is processing for transmitting a payout command.
In the payout command transmission process, first, as described in FIG. 16, the counters of the plurality of winning number counter areas 2 provided for the number of winning balls (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). Among them, it is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the counter to be checked (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and checking of the counting numbers of all counters in winning number counter area 2 is completed. It is determined whether or not it is (step S203).

  If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the counter of the target winning number counter area 2 is subtracted ("-1" updated) (step S204). The number of payouts corresponding to the address of the area 2 (for example, any of the above three, ten or fourteen) is acquired (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining prize ball area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining prize ball area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208) It is determined whether the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209). If it is determined in step S209 that the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209; Y), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area. (Step S211).

  In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process described later, the main prize ball signal is output based on the number of times the main prize ball signal is updated in step S210. Here, as the winning ball signal (main winning ball signal), one pulse is outputted from the main substrate (game control device 100) for every 10 pieces of payout schedule, and 10 pieces are dispensed from the payout substrate (disbursement control device 200). One pulse is output each time.

  Next, in the determination in step S203, it is determined that all the checks have ended (step S203; Y), or in the determination in step S209, the subtraction result is determined not to be “0” or more (step S209; N) In the case where the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated by "-1" (step S212). If the payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” because the initial value set in the last step S221 of the payout command transmission process is not set. From that, no subtraction will be done.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213), and when the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), It is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, as a condition for the payout busy signal to be on (busy), "diverting operation", "ball lending operation", "shooting ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio wave illegal occurrence" "Medium", "due to a drop of ball detection switch (switch to monitor dispensed balls)", "due to underdelivery error", "due to overdelivery error", "a prize to be dispensed in the memory of the dispensing control board When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of acquired game balls) (when it is not 0) or the like.

  Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether the target counter of the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215) and the target counter of the winning number counter area 1 If there is no count (step S215; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the check of all the areas is not completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

  In step S215, if there is a count in the target counter of winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by “−1” (step S218), and the address of winning number counter area 1 is The corresponding payout number command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the serial transmission buffer for payout (step S220). Then, an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

  When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213; N), when it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y) If it is determined in step S217 that all areas have been checked (step S217; Y), or if the process of step S221 is completed, the payout command transmission process is ended.

  As can be understood from the configuration in which the processing is terminated without executing steps S215 and later depending on the determination results of steps S213 and S214, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed. Have been sent since. In addition, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control substrate side can pay out the winning balls.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step S68) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

  In the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a prize monitoring table of starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37) is prepared (step A101), hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, and the starting opening It is determined whether or not there is a win to 1 (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the starting opening 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the starting opening 1 (step A103; Y), the game state is a predetermined state to be hit on the right (for example, general support state, big hit, etc.) It is determined whether there is any (step A104).

When it is determined in step A104 that the predetermined state is not right to hit (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the vehicle is in the predetermined state to be swayed (step A104; Y), a stern command notification command is prepared (step A105), and a rendering command setting process (step A106) Do. That is, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, with the exception of the general electric power support state, the player hardly wins unless it is left hitting the starting opening 1, and the starting opening 1 has winning in the predetermined state In this case, since it can be estimated that the vehicle has been driven to the left even though the vehicle is in the predetermined state to be driven to the right, the presentation control device 300 transmits a notification (warning) instructing the player to issue a right strike instruction notification command to the presentation control device 300 to strike the right. Configured to

Next, after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the starting opening 1 (step A107), the special view starting opening 1 switch processing (step A108) is performed.
Next, a prize monitoring table for the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92) is prepared (step A109), hard random number acquisition processing (step A110) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the starting opening 2 (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the starting opening 2 (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the starting opening 2 (step A111; Y), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the general power support state (time saving state) (step A112) If it is determined that the general-purpose power transmission support state is not set (Step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress (Step A113). If it is determined in step A113 that the jackpot is not in progress (step A113; N), it is determined whether the special view fluctuation display game is in the final movement of the general power support (step A114).

  If it is determined in step A114 that the power conversion support is not in the final change (step A114; N), a left-handed command notification command is prepared (step A115), and effect command setting processing (step A116) is performed. That is, since it should be left-handed if it is not a normal power support state, a big hit, or a general power support final variation, a process of transmitting a left-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 is performed.

  Then, when it is determined in step A112 that it is in the general power support state (step A112; Y), when it is determined in step A113 that it is in the big hit (step A113; Y), the general power support final in step A114. If it is determined that it is changing (step A114; Y), the process proceeds to step A117 when the process of step A116 is completed.

  In step A117, a table for setting information on hold by the starting opening 2 is prepared (step A117), and the special view starting opening 2 switch processing (step A118) is performed to end the starting opening switch monitoring processing.

  If it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the starting opening 2, for example, before executing step A112, the common electric power fraudulent (normal though the normal change winning device 37 is closed, it is normal There is provided a step of determining whether or not there is a prize in the variable winning device 37 being detected (improper detection), and if it is determined that this general electric power fraud is occurring, the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended without executing step A112 or later. The configuration may be such that the second start memory (start memory of Toku-zu 2) is not generated any more if there is a common electric power fraud.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37) and the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92), the winning no information of the starting opening to be monitored is set ( Step A121) It is determined whether there is an input to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the starting port 2 switch 92a (Step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. When latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A125). Then, of the starting opening 1 and the starting opening 2, the winning prize information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.

[Special figure starting port 1 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting opening 1 switch processing (step A108) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view starting opening 1 switch process of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting port 1 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored (the start winning of the special figure 1 to be monitored).
In the special view starting opening 1 switch processing, first, the starting opening signal 1 output, which is the number of times of outputting information on the number of winnings to the starting opening 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of times is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether the number of times of output overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal 1 output number area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process passes step A134 and proceeds to the process of step A135. In the first embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal 1 output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” when “+1” is updated, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure 1 reservations (number of start memories of special figure 1) to be updated corresponding to the starting opening 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored is less than the upper limit (for example, less than 4). (Step A135). When the number of special figure 1 reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure starting port 1 switch process is ended. If the number of special figure 1 reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), set the special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting of fluctuation information (for example, for sorting of pre-reading fluctuation pattern) ( Step A136) The special figure 1 pending number to be updated is updated by “+1” (step A137).

  Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number storage area of RWM is prepared in step A125. (Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

  Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A 142), and the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 The data is saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A143), and the special map reservation information determination process (step A144) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special drawing 1 holding number command corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number to be monitored is prepared (step A145), rendering command setting processing (step A 146) is performed, and the special drawing starting opening 1 switch processing is ended. .

  Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special view changing display game A start winning memory storing means is provided which stores a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory which becomes an execution right of the above. In addition, the start winning memory storage means (RAM 111C) is the first start of the various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37), with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Store as a memory.

[Special figure starting mouth 2 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special view start port 2 switch process (step A118) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described using FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view starting opening 2 switch process of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting port 2 switch process is a process that is performed when there is an input of the starting port 2 switch 92a to be monitored (starting winning of the special figure 2 to be monitored).
In the special view starting opening 2 switch processing, first, the starting opening signal 2 output number of times which is the number of times of outputting information on the number of winnings to the starting opening 2 switch 92a to the external management device of the gaming machine 10 is loaded ( Step A151) The loaded value is updated by “+1” (Step A152), and it is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (Step A153). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the start opening signal 2 output number area of RWM (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A153; Y), the process passes step A154 and shifts to the process of step A155. In the first embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal 2 output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” when “+1” is updated, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reservations (starting memories) to be updated corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 92a to be monitored is less than the upper limit (for example, less than 4) (step A155). If the number of special views 2 to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A 155; N), the special view starting opening 2 switch process is ended. If the number of special figures 2 to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A 155; Y), set the special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting of fluctuation information (for example, for sorting of prefetch fluctuation patterns) ( Step A156) The special figure 2 pending number to be updated is updated by “+1” (step A157).

  Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 2) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is calculated (step A158), and the big hit random number storage area of RWM is prepared in step A125. (Step A159). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted and prepared (step A160), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A161).

  Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A 162), and the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 The data is saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A 163), and the special map reservation information determination process (step A 164) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special drawing 2 holding number command corresponding to the special drawing 2 holding number to be monitored is prepared (step A 165), rendering command setting processing (step A 166) is performed, and the special drawing starting opening 2 switch processing is ended. .

  Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the gaming balls into the starting winning area of the starting winning opening 92 and starts the right to execute the special view fluctuation display game. The start winning storage means stores a predetermined number as the upper limit as the storage. In addition, the start winning memory storage unit (RAM 111C) stores various random number values extracted based on the game ball winning on the starting opening 2 (start winning opening 92) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view reserve information determination process (step A 144, step A 164) in the special view start port 1 switch process and the special view start port 2 switch process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special-image hold information determination process of the first embodiment.

  The special view reserve information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

  In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (during high probability) (step A172). If it is determined in step A172 that the high probability is in progress (step A172; Y), the special image holding information determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A172 that the high probability is not in progress (step A172; N), it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress (step A173). If it is determined in step A173 that a big hit is in progress (step A173; Y), the special image storage information determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A173 that the big hit is not in progress (step A173; N), the big hit determination process (in which the big hit is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value) Step A174) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (step A175). And, if the judgment result is a big hit (step A175; Y), the jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (in other words, special figure type; special figure 1 or special figure 2 type) It sets (step A176), acquires the stop design information which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is prepared at step A140 or A160 (step A177), it moves to the processing of step A184 and does the processing after that.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A175; N), the small hit determination process (step A179) to determine whether it is a small hit by whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Do. Thereafter, it is determined whether the determination result of the small hitting determination processing is a small hit (step A180). Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A180; N), the stop symbol information of the removal is set (step A183), the process proceeds to step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A180; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set, and a small hit stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162. Are set (step A182), and the process proceeds to step A184 to perform the subsequent processes.

  And if it transfers to step A184, the prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set in either step A177, step A182 or step A183 is prepared (step A184), and production command setting processing (step) Do A185). Next, a special pattern information setting process (step A186) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process (step A187) for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game. Do.

  Thereafter, a prefetch variation pattern corresponding to a first half variation number indicating a first half variation pattern (variation pattern up to reach action start) and a second half variation pattern (variation pattern after reach action start) in a variation pattern of the special view variation display game A command is prepared (step A188), an effect command setting process (step A189) is performed, and the special figure hold information determination process is ended.

  The special figure information setting process in step A186 and the variation pattern setting process in step A187 are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process (special figure 1 routine process or special figure 2 routine process described later). Is similar to the That is, when the special view reserve information determination process is executed in step A144, since the special view type is special view 1, the process of steps A186 and A187 is the special view 1 information setting process and special view 1 variation described later. Since the special drawing type is the special figure 2 when the special figure holding information determination process is executed in step A164, which is the same as the pattern setting process, the process of steps A186 and A187 will be described later in the special figure 2 information. The setting process and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process are respectively the same.

  Through the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special view variation display game based on the start storage of the prefetch target and the prefetch variation pattern command including information of the variation pattern in the special view variation display game based on the start storage It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not the big hit or the change pattern type) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start storage in the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained) Judgment) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the starting winning combination when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. Good.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 game process (step S73a) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view 1 game process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 game process, monitoring of the input of the special winning opening switch 38a, control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, display of the special figure 1 (identification information variably displayed in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game) Make settings for. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit in the special figure 2 or small hit (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state according to the result of the special view 2 fluctuation display game) (step A1) . When it is not in the middle hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 (step A1; N), it does large winning a prize mouth switch supervisory processing (step A2). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing for monitoring the detection of the gaming ball with the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit or small hit in the special figure 2 (step A1; Y) and the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is finished, the process proceeds to step A3. If the game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special view 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special view 1 game processing timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is already up, to branch to the processing corresponding to the special view 1 game processing number The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number (step A7).

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “0” in step A7, the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the setting and effect setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special During special processing 1 special processing (step A8) which sets the information which is necessary in order to do processing in Figure 1 during fluctuation is done.

  At step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure 1 is used to set the stop display time of the special figure 1, set the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process, etc. (1) Perform a process during fluctuation (step A9).

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big of each big hit The special figure 1 display process (step A10) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the winning opening opening pattern and to set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process.

  If the special processing 1 game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the updating of the opening number, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "4" in step A7, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, if it is the final round, the processing of setting the ending command, the big winning opening A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information necessary for performing the remaining ball process.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "5" in step A7, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the information necessary for performing fanfare / in-interval processing, etc., the final round For example, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing special figure 1 big hit end processing, etc. Do.

  In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", special figure 1 big hit end processing (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for special figure 1 normal processing.

  At step A7, when the special processing 1 game processing number is "7", the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the predetermined big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, the small hit processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) is performed to set information etc. necessary for the execution.

  At step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “8”, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hitting medium movement transition processing, the command of the small hitting end screen, the small hitting remaining ball processing, etc. The small hit middle process (step A16) is performed.

  In step A7, when the special figure 1 game process number is "9", the small hit residual ball process (step A17) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end process.

  At step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", special figure 1 small hit end processing (step A18) is performed to set information etc. necessary for special figure 1 normal processing.

  Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed, and the special figure game process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if the value of the special view 1 game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processing Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display), and when the condition device is activated, a big hit condition occurs, for example, and it is a special special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Special figure 2 game processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 game process (step S73b) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 23 is a view showing a flowchart of the special view 2 game process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 game process, the monitoring of the input of the special winning opening switch 38a, the control of the whole process regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the display of the special figure 2 Make settings for. In the special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit or small hit of the special figure 1 (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state according to the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game) (step A31) . When it is not in the middle hit or the small hit of the special figure 1 (step A31; N), it executes the special winning opening switch monitor processing (step A32). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing for monitoring the detection of the gaming ball with the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, when it is determined that the big hit or small hit in the special figure 1 (step A31; Y), and when the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is finished, the process proceeds to step A33. If the special processing 2 game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A33). The minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special view 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0". It is determined whether there is any (step A35). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by "-1" (step A36). The long variation timer value (for example, 60000 msec) is saved in the special processing 2 game processing timer area which is an area for storing the value of the game processing timer (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

  On the other hand, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A35; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number. A table is set in a register (step A38), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special view 2 game process number is acquired using the table (step A39). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step A47).

  At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game and the setting of the effect, the special Special figure 2 usual processing (step A48) which does the setting and the like of information which is necessary in order to do processing in Figure 2 fluctuation is done.

  At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is “1”, the special figure 2 is used to set the stop display time of the special figure 2, set the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, etc. 2) Perform a process during fluctuation (step A49).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "2" in step A47, if the special view 2 variation display game's gaming result is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of big hit, the big of each big hit The special figure 2 display process (step A50) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the winning opening opening pattern and to set the information necessary to perform the fan fare / interval process.

  In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of opening, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. The fanfare / interval process to be performed (step A51) is performed.

  At step A47, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A52) is performed to set information required to perform ball processing.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "5" in step A47, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the information necessary for performing fanfare / in-interval processing, etc., the final round For example, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A53) for setting the information necessary for performing special figure 2 big hit end processing, etc. Do.

  At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6," special figure 2 big hit end processing (step A54) is performed to set information necessary for performing special figure 2 usual processing.

  At step A47, when the special processing 2 game processing number is “7”, the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the predetermined big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, the small hitting middle processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A55) is performed to set information required to perform the process.

  At step A47, if the special processing 2 game processing number is "8", the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hitting medium movement transition processing, the command of the small hitting end screen, the small hitting remaining ball processing, etc. The small hit middle process (step A56) is performed.

  At step A47, when the special figure 2 game process number is "9", the small hit residual ball process (step A57) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end process.

  At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", special figure 2 small hit end processing (step A58) is performed to set information necessary for special figure 2 normal processing.

  Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A59), the symbol variation control process (step A60) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special figure game process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" at step A34 (step A34; N), that is, if the time is not up or the process at step A37 is completed, step A59 is performed. It shifts to processing and performs processing after that.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 routine processing (step A8) in the special view 1 game processing described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special processing 1 ordinary processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 can start changing (that is, whether the special figure 1 variable display game can be started) (step A251). In this judgment, the game state is the period from the end of fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 2 (start of processing during the special figure 2 display) to the end of the hit action (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state) In the case of the state of, that is, when the special figure 2 is hit, the special figure 1 determines that the variation start is not possible, and when it is not the period, the special figure 1 determines that the variation start is possible.

  Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 can start changing (step A251; Y), whether or not the left hitting instruction has been notified (that is, the left hitting instruction notifying command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and then the right hitting instruction) It is determined whether the notification command has not been transmitted (step A252). In step A252, it is determined that the left hitting instruction notification has been completed if the left hitting instruction notification flag is set, and it is determined that the left hitting instruction not notified is not set if the left hitting instruction notification flag is not set. It may be a configuration.

  If the left hitting instruction notification has not been made (step A252; N), prepare a left hitting instruction notification command (step A253), perform rendering command setting processing (step A254), and set the left hitting instruction notification flag (step A254) A255).

  If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step A 252; Y) and if step A 255 is ended, the process proceeds to step A 256, and the number of special drawing 1 reservations (first start memory number) is “0” It is determined whether or not it is (step A256). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" (step A256; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current special condition variation display game probability state is prepared (step A257). The setting process (step A258) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) is performed, and the decoration special figure holding number command corresponding to the special figure 1 holding number is prepared (step A260), and the rendering command setting process (step A261) do, set information showing special map 1 fluctuation (during special figure 1 fluctuation display game) in the special drawing status area in RWM (information addition) (step A262), probability of the special drawing fluctuation display game It is determined whether the state is in high probability (step A263).

  In the special view status area, information indicating that special figure 1 is moving (during special figure 1 variable display game) and information indicating that special figure 2 is moving (during special figure 2 variable display game) This is an area to be stored independently, and the state indicated by the information set in the special view status area is the special view status. When step A 262 is executed, the special view status is either “special figure 1 in change” or “special figure 1 in change + special figure 2 in change”.

  Also, in the special figure 1 change start process (step A 259), a process of saving “1” which is a process number related to the special figure 1 during change process in the special figure 1 game process number area (steps A318 and A319 described later) Processing for saving the flag during fluctuation in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A322 described later), processing in which the fluctuation time is set as the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (steps A307 and A497 described later), etc. are performed .

  Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A263; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A264). If the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A264; N) The fluctuation check flag in FIG. 1 is set (step A265). It is to be noted that the determination as to whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is being performed is performed by a high probability final fluctuation flag described later. That is, if the high probability final change flag is set, it is determined that the high probability final change is in progress.

  Then, when the step A265 is finished, when it is determined that the high probability is in progress (step A263; Y), and when it is determined that the high probability final variation is in progress (step A264; Y) (1) Perform a process transition setting process (step A266) during fluctuation, and end the special figure 1 ordinary process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 can not start changing (step A251; N), and when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" at step A256 (step A256; Y), Set “0” (Step A 267), save the processing number “0” in the special figure 1 game processing number area which is the area for storing the special figure 1 game processing number in RWM (step A 268) 1 Finish processing normally.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the determination result in step A 251 is affirmative and the special figure 1 hold count is not “0”, the special figure 1 change start process (step A 259) is executed. , Even if the special figure 2 is in the process of being changed (during the special figure 2 variable display game being executed), the special figure 1 change display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the first start memory in the first start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the first start memory is the variable display based on the second start memory It is a control means that can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 routine processing (step A48) in the special view 2 game processing described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 25 is a view showing a flowchart of special processing 2 usual processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 routine processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 can start changing (that is, whether the special figure 2 variable display game can be started) (step A271). In this judgment, the game state is the period from the end of fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 1 (start of processing during the special figure 1 display) to the end of the hit action (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state) In the case of the state of, that is, when the special figure 1 is hit, the special figure 2 determines that the variation start is not possible, and when the period is not, the special figure 2 determines that the variation start is possible.

  When it is determined that the special figure 2 can start changing (step A271; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figures 2 (second starting memory number) is “0” (step A 272) . Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" (step A272; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure variation display game is prepared (step A273). The setting process (step A 274) is performed, the special figure 2 change start process (step A 275) is performed, and information indicating that special figure 2 is changing (special figure 2 changing display game is being executed) is set in the special figure status area in RWM. (Information addition) (step A276), it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high probability or not (step A277).

  Here, the state indicated by the information set in the special view status area (that is, the special view status) is “during special figure 2 fluctuating” and “special figure 1 fluctuating + special figure 2 fluctuating” when step A 276 is executed. It will be in one of two states.

  Also, in the special figure 2 change start process (step A 275), a process of saving “1” which is a process number related to the special figure 2 in-process process in the special figure 2 game process number area (steps A348 and A349 described later) Processing for saving the flag during fluctuation in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A 352 described later), processing in which the fluctuation time is set as the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (steps A 337 and A 497 described later), etc. are performed .

  In addition, for example, after executing step A 275, prepare a decorative special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the special drawing 2 reservation number, and then execute a rendering command setting process, and then shift to step A 276 (namely, special drawing 2) Also in the case of (1), the decoration special drawing reservation number command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the normal processing).

  Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A 277; N), it is judged whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A 278). If it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A 278; N) The fluctuation check flag is set (step A279).

  Then, when step A279 is completed, when it is determined that the high probability is in progress (step A277; Y), and when it is determined that the high probability final variation is in progress (step A278; Y), (2) Perform process transition setting process (step A280) during fluctuation, and finish the special figure 2 ordinary process.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A272; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is "0" (step A281), and the special figure 1 reservation number is If it is determined that it is "0" (step A281; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in motion (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (step A282). Then, if the special figure 1 is not moving (step A282; N), it is judged whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step A283), and the customer waiting demo is not started (step A283; N) ) Sets the waiting for customer demonstration flag in the waiting for customer demonstration flag area (step A284). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step A285), and a rendering command setting process (step A286) is performed. Note that a command (here, customer waiting demo command) prepared to perform the rendering command setting process is transmitted to the rendering control device 300.

  Then, when step A 286 ends, when it is determined that the special figure 2 can not start changing (step A 271; N), and when the number of special figure 1 reservations is not “0” (step A 281; N), If FIG. 1 is fluctuating (Step A 282; Y) and if the customer waiting demo has been started (Step A 283; Y), “0” is set as the processing number (Step A 287). The processing number, ie, “0” is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special figure 2 game processing number (step A 288), and the special figure 2 routine processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the determination result in step A 271 is affirmative, and the special figure 2 reserve number is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step A 275) is executed. Even if the special figure 1 is in the process of being changed (during the special figure 1 change display game being executed), the special figure 2 change display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a control means that can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A 259) in the special figure 1 normal process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special view 1 variation start process of the first embodiment; FIG. 27 is a second diagram of the flowchart of the special view 1 fluctuation start process of the first embodiment;

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 1) is set (step A301). A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A302) for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 303) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure 1 information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern which is a table in which information for setting special pattern 1 information setting processing (step A 304) to set is performed and information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. A setting information table is prepared (step A305). After that, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step A306) which sets fluctuation pattern which is fluctuation aspect in the 1st special figure fluctuation display game, is executed, fluctuation start information setting which sets information of fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game A process (step A307) is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special view variable display game is high or not (step A308).

  Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A308; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A309), and if it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309; N) It is determined whether or not FIG. 2 is changing (during special figure 2 changing display game execution) (step A310). If the special figure 2 is changing (step A310; Y), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A311; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312). If the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is not more than, for example, "4" (step A312; N), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is calculated (step A313).

  Note that the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is in the variation start information setting process of step A 337 described later when the special figure 2 game processing timer is in a state of a time value sufficient for 2 bytes (for example, 60000 ms). It is set to "0" (see, for example, step A500 described later).

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (execution time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) can be calculated from the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area). Specifically, in step A313, the special variation 2 game processing at that time is performed on the result of multiplying the long variation timer value (for example, 60000 ms) saved in step A37 described above by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer. The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 can be calculated by adding the value of the timer area.

  Also, when the long fluctuation timer value is, for example, 60000 ms (= 60 seconds), the value of the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is 240 Seconds (= 4 × 60 seconds) or more, which is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure 1. In this case, there is no need to execute step A 315 and step A 316 described later, and it is necessary to determine A312 is provided. Therefore, the numeric value "4" in step A312 is a numeric value for determining in advance by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer whether the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the longest variation time of the special figure 1. It is only an example of

  Next, when step A313 is completed, and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311; Y), the process proceeds to step A314, and the special figure 1 to be started from now on If the fluctuation time of (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A306) is the remaining fluctuation time of Tokubo 2 currently fluctuating (the calculation result of step A313 or the Toku 2 game processing timer repeat count is zero) It is determined whether it is shorter than the special figure 2 time determined by the value of the game processing timer (step A 314).

  Then, if the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A 314; N), prepare a command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step A 315) And effect command setting processing (step A316).

  Next, when it is in the high probability (step A308; Y), when it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309; Y), when the special figure 2 is not in the fluctuation (step A310; N), the special figure 2 game If the number of repetitions of the processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312; Y), the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A314; Y); Is completed, the process proceeds to step A317 (FIG. 27).

  At step A317, the high probability change number update process (step A317) is performed, and “1” is set as the process number (step A318). The processing number, ie, “1” is saved in the game processing number area (step A319), and the customer waiting demonstration flag area which is an area for setting the customer waiting demonstration flag in the RWM is cleared (step A320). After that, save the signal related to the special figure 1 fluctuation start (the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is on) in the test signal output data area (step A321) and save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area of RWM ( Step A322) Save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special display 1 symbol display unit 53) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area of RWM (step A323). In the symbol number area in FIG. 1 variation, an initial value (for example, "0" corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved (step A324), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended. Note that the reason for saving "0" in the symbol number area during special figure 1 variation in step A324 is to start the variation indication of the special figure 1 from the blank symbol.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 fluctuation start process (step A 275) in the special view 2 normal process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special view 2 variation start process of the first embodiment; FIG. 29 is a second diagram of the flowchart of the special view 2 fluctuation start process of the first embodiment.

  The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is set (step A331), and the second special figure fluctuation display game is A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A332) for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step A 333) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure 2 information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern which is a table in which information for setting special pattern 2 information setting processing (step A 334) to set is performed and information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. A setting information table is prepared (step A335). After that, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step A336) which sets the fluctuation pattern which is fluctuation aspect in 2nd special figure fluctuation display game, is executed, fluctuation start information setting which sets information of fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game A process (step A337) is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special view variable display game is high or not (step A338).

  Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A338; N), it is judged whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A339), and if it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A339; N) It is determined whether or not FIG. 1 is changing (during special figure 1 changing display game execution) (step A340). When the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step A340; Y), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A343). The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 can be calculated from the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area).

  Next, when step A343 is completed, the process proceeds to step A344, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A336) to be started from now is the special figure 1 currently being fluctuated. It is determined whether it is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (the calculation result of step A343) (step A344).

  Then, if the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (step A344; N), prepare a command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer (step A345). And effect command setting processing (step A346).

  Next, if it is in the high probability (step A 338; Y), if it is in the high probability final change (step A 339; Y), if the special figure 1 is not in the change (step A 340; N) If the fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (step A344; Y), and if step A346 is finished, the process proceeds to step A347 (FIG. 29).

  At step A347, the high probability change number update process (step A347) is performed, and "1" is set as the process number (step A348), and the special figure 2 is an area for storing the special process 2 game process number in RWM. The processing number, ie, "1" is saved in the game processing number area (step A349), and the customer waiting demonstration flag area which is an area for setting a customer waiting demonstration flag in the RWM is cleared (step A350). After that, save the signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation start (the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is on) in the test signal output data area (step A351) and save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area of RWM ( Step A352) Save the initial value (100 ms, for example) of the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking cycle of the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area of RWM (step A353). During the variation, the initial value (for example, "0" corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended. It is to be noted that the reason for saving "0" in the symbol number area during special figure 2 variation in step A354 is to start variation indication of special figure 2 from the blank symbol.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A307 and A337) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described using FIG. 30 and FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the variation start information setting process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a second diagram of the flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the information of the random number storage area of the target fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is cleared. That is, it is determined whether the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step A491), and when the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step A491; Y), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of the special drawing 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the information (for holding ball 1) of the random number storage area (for holding ball 1) of fluctuation pattern random number 3 are cleared (step A491a). In addition, when the information setting in the special figure 1 is not being performed (step A 491; N), the information in the random number storage area of the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern random number 3 in the special figure 2 is cleared (step A491 b).

  Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

  Then, the former half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value are added (step A 496), and the added value is the target figure game processing timer area (that is, the special figure 1 game processing timer area during information setting of While the information setting of the special figure 2 is made, it saves in the special figure 2 game processing timer area) (step A 497).

  Next, it is determined whether the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step A 498), and when the information setting of the special figure 1 is not being performed (step A 498; N), it is determined whether the long fluctuation start of the special figure 2 is (step A499), if it is not the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step A499; N), the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the area storing the repeat count of the special figure 2 game processing timer in RWM) Save 0 "(step A500).

  On the other hand, if it is the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step A 499; Y), “9” is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A 501). Then, when the information setting in the special view 1 is being performed (step A 498; Y), when the processing in steps A 500 and A 501 is finished, the process proceeds to step A 502.

  It should be noted that the number of repetitions (the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer) is set in the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 in order to make the time fluctuation not sufficient with the 2-byte special figure game processing timer. If 60000 ms, for example, is set in the special view 2 game processing timer area in step A 497 as the addition result in step A 496 and “9” is saved as the number of repetitions in step A 501, timer interrupt processing (step A 33 described above) The value of the special view 2 game processing timer is subtracted, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions of the special view game processing timer is decremented by 1 in the above-mentioned step A36, and further in the above special step 2 game processing timer area. 60000 ms is set. Therefore, in this case, as a result, the total fluctuation time of the special figure 2 becomes a fluctuation time of 10 minutes at 60000 ms × 10 in this embodiment. In fact, since it is a 4 ms timer interrupt, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, the case where it can be expressed by multiplication of 60 seconds is described as an example.

  Next, in step A502, data (MODE) of the fluctuation command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is prepared (step A502), and data (ACTION) of the fluctuation command corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is prepared (step A503) And effect command setting processing (step A504).

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the effect command setting process, the prepared command data (MODE and ACTION) are written to the effect serial transmission buffer unless the effect serial transmission buffer is full. As a result, a rendering command composed of the prepared command data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the rendering control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the gaming control device 100. The same applies to the case where the effect command setting process is executed by being called in another step. Further, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like a rendering command, but it may be configured in more bytes. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to the multi-byte configuration may be used.

  Next, when step A504 is ended, it is judged whether the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step A505), and when the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step A505; Y) Is updated by “−1” (step A506), the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 is set, the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507), and the information of the free area after shift is cleared. Then (step A508), the variation start information setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the information setting of the special figure 1 is not being performed (step A505; N), the special figure 2 reservation number is updated by “−1” (step A506a), and the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 is set. The random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507a), the information on the free space after the shift is cleared (step A508a), and the variation start information setting process is ended.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (RAM 111C). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the effect command setting process described above, and the effect control device 300 based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game The detailed effect contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are set according to the determined fluctuation pattern, and the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is executed. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game For example, a variation command (sometimes referred to as a variation pattern command) including information related to a pattern may be mentioned, and for example, each effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a predetermined order as shown in the flowchart of this embodiment. .

[High probability change frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the high probability change number updating process (steps A317 and A347) in the special view 1 change start process and the special view 2 change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the high probability variation count updating process of the first embodiment.

  In the high probability variation number updating process, first, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is in the high probability (step A551), and the special figure height probability is not in the process (step A551; N) , High probability change number of times update processing ends.

  In addition, when one of the types of the special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is a big hit game state, the hit probability of the other variation display game is always controlled to a low probability, but one is small In the case of a hit, the other may be in high probability.

  If the probability is high (step A551; Y), the number of times of high probability fluctuation managing the number of times of execution of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the high probability state is updated by “-1” (step A552). It is determined whether the number is "0" (step A553).

  If the high probability fluctuation number is not "0" (step A553; N), the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended. If the number of times of high probability change is "0" (step A553; Y), a signal regarding the end of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A555). Note that the signal related to the high probability end is a signal that turns off the big hit 2 signal.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & short time (high probability & short or no high probability & short) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 556). In addition, the signal about the end of the high probability & time short is the signal to turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signal to turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal off A signal to turn on, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Further, even in the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the common drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric utility 1 open extension state signal are always off.

  Then, save the number in the low probability in the gaming state display number area (step A 557), save the special figure low probability & time saving none flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A 559), start changing symbols (special The high probability final change flag corresponding to FIG. 1 or the special figure 2) is set (step A 560), and the high probability change number update process is ended.

  The high probability final change flag includes information that can determine the type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game that is the high probability final variation. In addition, since the internal probability becomes low probability at the start of fluctuation in high probability final fluctuation, the information to show that it is fluctuation started in high probability even if it is low probability now is high It is a probability final change flag. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, in the high probability final change, the probability state (the set state in the game control apparatus 100) of the target special figure is returned to the low probability at the change start time. Thus, when the gaming ball wins the starting opening during the final round in the high probability state, it is possible to prevent the problem that the hit determination for the starting winning will be determined with high probability.

[Process during special figure 1 change]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 during fluctuation process (step A9) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described using FIG. 33 and FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 during variation processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 during variation processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 fluctuation process, first, the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by “+1” (step A 571), and the decorative special figure 1 command area from the command area (special figure 1 including information of stop symbol about special figure 1) The command is loaded and prepared (step A572), and effect command setting processing (step A573) is performed.

  Next, the decoration special figure 1 stop command (pattern stop command about special figure 1) is prepared (step A 574), the rendering command setting process (step A 575) is performed, and the final high probability final state according to the state of high probability final variation flag It is determined whether or not there is a change (step A576). And, if it is not the high probability final change (step A 576; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process The display time at the time of the high probability final change is set as the stop display time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the present case in the case of the high probability final change (step A576; Y). The setting is made (step A578), and the process proceeds to step A579. Here, the stop display time set in steps A577 and A578 is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A579.

  In the case of the first embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern. In some cases, 2000 ms is set as the display time, and 136 ms is set as the display time if the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern. In addition, the display time of the high probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step A579 (FIG. 34), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 1 fluctuation display game is released based on the information determined and set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing. (Step A579), in the case of detachment (Step A579; Y), the process proceeds to Step A 594, and in the case of no detachment (Step A 579; N), the special figure 2 is also changing (special figure 2 variation display game being executed) It is determined whether there is any (step A 580).

  It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is fluctuating should be made by any of the information of the special figure 2 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area or the information of the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area Can. In other words, if "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, it may be determined that it is in the changing state. If the special figure 2 changing state is set in the special figure status area, it is determined that it is in the changing state. It may be a configuration, it may be a configuration in which it is determined that a variation flag is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag region, or a configuration in which it is determined by a combination of these conditions.

  Then, when the special figure 2 is also changing (step A 580; Y), it is judged whether the process is being executed during the special figure 2 display (step A 581) and the special figure 2 is not being executed. In the case (step A 581; N), the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by “+1” (step A 582).

  Next, when step A 582 is ended, and the special figure 2 display processing is being executed (step A 581; Y), the display time of the present special figure 1 (the time set in step A 577 etc.) For example, the result obtained by adding 4 ms is set as the display time of Toku-zu 2 (step A583), and the display time of Toku-zu 2 is saved in the Toku 2 game processing timer area (step A584). When the special view 2 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special view 2 is reset by the processing of steps A583 and A584. By this resetting, the display time of the special view 2 is basically extended, but in some cases it may be shortened.

  After that, a command (the decoration special figure 2 command including information on the stop symbol about the special drawing 2) is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area, prepared (step A585), and effect command setting processing (step A586) is performed. Next, the decoration special figure 2 stop command (pattern stop command about special figure 2) is prepared (step A 587), the rendering command setting process (step A 588) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step A) Do A589).

  In addition, according to the processing of steps A579 to A589 described above, if the present special figure 1 fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is hit (big hit or small hit) from now on, the special figure being changed at the same time It will end the fluctuation display of 2 forcibly.

  Next, when step A 589 is finished and special figure 2 is not changing (step A 580; N), the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step A 590) Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game this time is a small hit (step A591).

  And when it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A591; N), in order to control the big hit game after the special figure 1 fluctuation end, information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (special figure 1 round number Determine the upper limit value. Load the special figure 1 round number upper limit information), save it in the round number upper limit information area (step A 592), load information from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area, and open special winning opening Save in the information area (step A593).

  Next, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of this time is disengaging (step A579; Y) and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of this time is a small hit (step A591; Y), step A593 is ended. If it is, the process moves to step A 594. When the process proceeds to step A594, information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A594). A595) is carried out, and the special figure 1 during fluctuation processing is ended. In the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  As described above, the game control apparatus 100 functions as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the first start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as means for ending the variable display game based on the second start memory currently being executed.

[Special figure 2 during processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 during fluctuation process (step A49) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described using FIG. 35 and FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during variation of the special view 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 36 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 during variation processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 fluctuation process, first, the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by “+1” (step A601), and the special figure 2 command area from the command area (special figure 2 including stop symbol information about special figure 2) The command is loaded and prepared (step A602), and effect command setting processing (step A603) is performed.

  Next, the decoration special figure 2 stop command (pattern stop command about special figure 2) is prepared (step A604), the rendering command setting process (step A605) is performed, and the final state of the high probability final variation flag It is determined whether or not there is a change (step A606). And, if it is not the high probability final change (step A 606; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process The display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation is set as the stop display time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the case of the high probability final fluctuation (step A606; Y). The setting is made (step A608), and the process proceeds to step A609. Here, the stop display time set in steps A 607 and A 608 is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A 609.

  In the case of the first embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, for example. Even in the case where there is a display time of 600 ms, the display time is set to 600 ms even when the stop design pattern is a small hit design pattern. In addition, the display time of the high probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms. In addition, in the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern by the removal symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set.

  Next, when moving to step A 609 (FIG. 36), it is determined whether or not the current (currently executing) special figure 2 fluctuation display game is released based on the information determined and set in the big hit flag 2 setting processing. (Step A 609), if it is dislocated (Step A 609; Y), it proceeds to Step A 624, and if it is not dislocated (Step A 609; N), currently the special figure 1 is also fluctuating (special figure 2 fluctuating display game being executed) It is determined whether there is any (step A610).

  It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 is fluctuating should be made by any of the information of the special figure 1 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area or the information of the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area Can. In other words, if "1" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area, it may be determined that it is in the changing state, or if the special figure 1 in the changing state is set in the special figure status area It may be a configuration, it may be a configuration in which it is determined that a variation flag is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area, or a configuration in which it is determined by a combination of these conditions.

  Then, if the special figure 1 is also changing (step A610; Y), it is judged whether the special figure 1 display process is being executed (step A611) and the special figure 1 display process is not being executed. In the case (step A611; N), the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by "+1" (step A612).

  Next, when step A 612 is ended, and when the special figure 1 display processing is being executed (step A 611; Y), the display time of the current special figure 2 (the time set in step A 607 etc.) For example, the result obtained by adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special view 1 (step A613), and the display time of the special view 1 is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step A614). When the special view 1 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special view 1 is reset by the processing of the steps A613 and A614. By this resetting, the display time of the special view 1 is basically extended, but in some cases it may be shortened.

  After that, a command (decorative special figure 1 command including information on stop symbol about special figure 1) is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepared (step A615), and effect command setting processing (step A616) is performed. Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command (pattern stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A 617), a rendering command setting process (step A 618) is performed, and a special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Do A619).

  In addition, according to the processing of the steps A 609 to A 619 described above, if the present special figure 2 fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is hit (big hit or small hit) from now on, the special figure being changed simultaneously. It will end the fluctuation display of 1 forcibly.

  Next, when step A619 is finished, and special figure 1 is not changing (step A610; N), the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step A620) Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game this time is a small hit (step A621).

  And, if it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A 621; N), information from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area to control the big hit game after the special figure 2 change end (special figure 2 round number Determine the upper limit value. Load the special figure 2 round number upper limit information), save in the round number upper limit information area (step A 622), load information from the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area, and open the special winning opening Save in the information area (step A623).

  Next, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of this time is disengaging (step A609; Y) and when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of this time is a small hit (step A621; Y), step A623 is ended. In the case, the process moves to step A624. At step A624, information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A624), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A625) is performed, and the special figure 2 in process of variation is ended. In the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  As described above, the game control apparatus 100 functions as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the second start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as means for ending the variable display game based on the first start memory currently being executed.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the processing for setting transition to processing during special processing 1 (step A 595) in the processing during special processing 1 during the above-mentioned special processing 1 fluctuation will be described using FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 1 during a special view 1 display of the first embodiment.

  In the special process 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, the process number "2" relating to the special figure 1 display process is set as the process number (step A631), and the special process 1 game process number area Save the number, ie "2" (step A632).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A633). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation.

  After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, save the stop flag related to the variation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 in the special figure 1 variation control flag area Step A634), special processing 1 being displayed processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the special processing 2 during display processing during special processing 2 fluctuation processing described above (step A625) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 1 during a special view 2 display of the first embodiment.

  In special processing 2 display processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number "2" which is processing number concerning the special processing 2 display processing is set as the processing number (step A641), the special processing 2 game processing number area Save the number "2" (step A 642).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A643). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation.

  After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, save the stop flag related to the variation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 in the special figure 2 variation control flag area ( Step A644), special processing 2 display processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 2]
Next, details of the special processing 1 during special processing 1 display processing during special processing 2 variation processing described above (step A619) will be described using FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 2 during display of the special view 1 of the first embodiment. It should be noted that when the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is a hit when the special figure 2 variation display game which has started variation is a hit, the special figure 1 variation display game which is simultaneously changing is forcibly ended with a break It is processing to make it happen. That is, it is a process for information setting when it is forcibly stopped by having hit the other pattern.

  In the special process 1 process transition setting process 2, first, the process number "2" relating to the special figure 1 process is set as the process number (step A651), and the special process 1 game process number area Save the number "2" (step A652).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A653). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation.

  After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, save the stop flag related to the variation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 in the special figure 1 variation control flag area Step A654) The off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (the area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM) (step A655). In this stop symbol pattern area, a special stop symbol pattern (usually depending on the extracted random number in the stop symbol pattern of the hit in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process) is usually already performed for the special view 1 fluctuation display game under execution. In some cases, the saved symbol pattern is saved, but here, even if the saved symbol pattern saved is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the missing symbol pattern. Similarly, in the subsequent steps A 656 to 661 of this routine, even if there is data once set in the normal step, it is cleared or reset for forced termination at the end.

  Next, clear the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (area for storing special figure 1 round number upper limit information in RWM) (step A 656), and special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (special figure in RWM 1) Clear the area where the big winning opening opening information is stored (step A657), and save the shift information in the small hitting flag 1 area (step A658). Deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A659). Here, the small hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 1 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 1, and the information on whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is the small hit or not This is an area of the RWM for storing each item of information, and the information is normally set in the big hit flag 1 setting process, and the information is set again here.

  Next, clear the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step A 660), save the shift stop symbol number in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A 661), and end the processing transition setting process 2 during special figure 1 display. .

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special processing 2 during display processing transition setting processing 2 (step A 589) in the special processing 1 during fluctuation processing described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 2 during display of the special view 2 of the first embodiment. The process transition setting process 2 during the special figure 2 display forcibly ends the special figure 2 variation display game which is simultaneously varying when the special figure 1 variation display game which has started variation is a hit. It is processing to make it happen. That is, it is a process for information setting when it is forcibly stopped by having hit the other pattern.

  In the special processing 2 display processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number "2" relating to the special processing 2 display processing is set as the processing number (step A671), and the processing in the special processing 2 game processing number area Save the number "2" (step A672).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A673). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation.

  After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, save the stop flag related to the variation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 in the special figure 2 variation control flag area ( Step A674) The off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (the area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM) (step A675). In this stop symbol pattern area, a special stop symbol pattern in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process (usually depending on the extracted random number is a stop symbol pattern of the hit in the special symbol 2 change display game under execution). In some cases, the saved symbol pattern is saved, but here, even if the saved symbol pattern saved is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the missing symbol pattern. Similarly, in the subsequent steps A 676 to 681 of this routine, even if there is data once set in the normal step, they are cleared or reset for forced termination at the end.

  Next, clear the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (area to store special figure 2 round number upper limit value information in RWM) (step A 676), and special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (special figure in RWM 2) Clear the area where the big winning opening opening information is stored (step A677), and save the shift information in the small hitting flag 2 area (step A678). Deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A679). Here, the small hit flag 2 area and the big hit flag 2 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 2, and the information on whether the special figure 2 variation display game is the small hit or not or the big hit This is an area of the RWM for storing the respective information, and the information is normally set in the big hit flag 2 setting process, and the information is set again here.

  Next, clear the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step A 680), save the shift stop symbol number in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A 681), and end the processing shift setting process 2 during the special figure 2 display. .

[Process while displaying special figure 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 in-display process (step A10) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special view 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 42 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of a special view 1 in display processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 43 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of processing during display of a special view 1 according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 701), and the information of the small hit flag 1 area of RWM is It clears (step A702).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A703), and the information on the big hit flag 1 area of RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is judged whether or not the big hit flag 1 loaded is a big hit (step A 705), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 705; Y), a big hit of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1) Save the signal related to the start of the big hit) in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A706), prepare the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command (step A707), perform the rendering command setting process (step A708) An upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal about the start of the special figure 1 big hit is a signal to turn on the signal during the condition device operation, a signal to turn on the item continuous action device operation, and a signal to turn the signal per special symbol 1 Including.

  Next, after setting the number-of-rounds upper limit table (step A709), the number-of-rounds upper limit corresponding to the number-of-rounds upper limit information (for example, “16” or “4” in the first embodiment, other, for example, “8” or “2” may be obtained and saved in the RWM round number upper limit value area (step A 710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, an ornament special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area of the RWM and prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A714), and effect command setting process (step A715) is performed. .

  Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A716, the big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, each on / off is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on if it is a big hit other than 2R hit, it is turned on if it is 2R hit big in high probability, and it is turned off if it is 2R hit big hit in low probability. Also, the big hit 3 signal is turned on if it is a big hit other than 2R hit, it is turned off if it is 2R hit in high probability, and it is turned on if it is 2R hit in low probability.

  Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step A717), and the set big hit fan fare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area Step A 718).

  The information on the special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A720), the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A721), and the process proceeds to step A724.

  At step A724, 3 is set as the process number (step A724), the process number, ie, "3" is saved in the special view 1 game process number area (step A725), and fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step A 726) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A705 (step A705; N), it is judged whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727), the small hit flag 1 is small When it is determined to be a hit (step A 727; Y), it is determined whether or not the high probability final change is in progress (step A 728).

  Then, when it is determined in step A728 that the high probability final fluctuation is being performed (step A728; Y), the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state ( The probability information command related to the information to be in the low probability state) is prepared (step A729), and the rendering command setting process (step A730) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step A731), and the right strike instruction notification flag is cleared (step A731) A732). In addition, step A732 assumes a mode in which a right-handed command notification is made in the high probability state, and since the high-probability state is determined as the high-probability final variation, the right-handed command notification flag is cleared. It is illustrated. However, if the present embodiment is a mode that does not issue a right-handed instruction notification in the high probability state, step A732 deletes the configuration (or left-handed instruction notification in the high probability state and performs the left-handed instruction notification in step A732 There may be an aspect in which the flag is cleared).

  Next, when step A732 ends and high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A728; N), the command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A733), rendering command setting processing (step A733) Do A734). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A735), and the effect command setting process (step A736) It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be hit to the left (for example, a state which is not in the general power support state, the big hit or the special mode) (step A737).

  If it is determined in step A737 that the predetermined state is to be left-handed (step A737; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738). The signal relating to the left-handed command is, for example, a signal for turning off the shooting position designation signal 1. Next, in order to extinguish the display LED in the right strike, the number in the left strike state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A739), and the process proceeds to step A743.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the predetermined state is to be left-handed (step A737; N), the signal regarding the right-handed command is saved in the test signal output data area (step A740). The signal relating to the right-handed command is, for example, a signal that turns on the emission position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn on the display LED in the right strike, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right strike state (step A741), and the process proceeds to step A743.

  At step A743, the information on the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A743), the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A744), and the processing shifts to step A747. .

  When the process proceeds to step A747, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium middle process transition setting process (step A747) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is ended. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, a process to save "7" as a process number in the special figure 1 game process number area, small hit fanfare time in the special figure 1 game process timer area (for example, 4 ms) Processing etc) to save

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A727 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A748).
Then, when it is determined in step A 748 that the high probability final fluctuation is being performed (step A 748; Y), the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game is the normal probability state ( A probability information command relating to information to be in the low probability state) is prepared (step A 749), and rendering command setting processing (step A 750) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step A751), and the right-handed command notification flag is cleared (step A 752), it is determined whether or not the special view 2 variation display game is middle hit (middle hit or middle hit) (step A 753). Note that step A 752 is just an example that assumes an aspect in which a right-handed indication is issued in the high probability state, as in the above-described step A 732.

  Next, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation display game is not hitting (step A 753; N), the signal relating to the left hitting instruction (fire position designation signal 1 is off) is saved in the test signal output data area ( Step A754) In order to turn off the display LED in the right strike, save the number in the left strike state in the gaming state display number 2 area (Step A755). In the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display game is middle hit (middle hit or small hit middle), the player hits the right to aim at the big winning opening (special variation winning device 38) opened at that time. If the special figure 2 is hit (step A 753; Y), the process passes steps A 754 and A 755 to shift to step A 756. In addition, also when step A755 ends, it moves to step A756.

  Then, when it moves to step A756, it clears (subtracts information) information showing that special figure 1 is moving in the special figure status area in RWM (during special figure 1 fluctuation display game) (step A756), special figure 1 game The process number relating to the special figure 1 normal process, ie, "0" is saved in the process number area (step A757), and the special figure 1 display process is ended. When step A 756 is executed, the special view status is in a state in which only the special view 2 is in a change state, or in a state in which neither the special view 1 nor the special view 2 is in a change state.

[Process during special figure 2 display]
Next, details of the special figure 2 in-display process (step A50) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 44 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special view 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 45 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special view 2 in display processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 46 is a diagram (No. 3) illustrating a flowchart of the special view 2 in display processing of the first embodiment;

  In the special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 761), and the information of the small hit flag 2 area of RWM is It clears (step A762).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special view 2 variation start process is loaded (step A 763), and the information on the big hit flag 2 area of RWM is cleared (step A 764). Then, it is judged whether or not the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A 765), and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 765; Y), the big hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2) Save the signal related to the start of the big hit) in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A766), prepare the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command (step A767), perform the rendering command setting process (step A768) An upper limit table is set (step A769). In addition, the signal about the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the signal which turns on the signal during condition device operation, the signal which turns on the character continuous operation device operation signal, and the signal which turns on the special symbol 2 signal. Including.

  Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A769), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, “16” or “4”, others, for example) “8” or “2” may be obtained and saved in the RWM round number upper limit value area (step A 770). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A 771).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A772), and effect command setting processing (step A773) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A774), and effect command setting process (step A775) is performed. .

  Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A776). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A776, the big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, each on / off is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on if it is a big hit other than 2R hit, it is turned on if it is 2R hit big in high probability, and it is turned off if it is 2R hit big hit in low probability. Also, the big hit 3 signal is turned on if it is a big hit other than 2R hit, it is turned off if it is 2R hit in high probability, and it is turned on if it is 2R hit in low probability.

  Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step A 777), and the set big hit fan fare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area Step A778).

  The information on the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A780), and the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A781), and the process proceeds to step A784.

  At step A784, 3 is set as the process number (step A784), and the process number, ie, "3" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step A785), fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step A786) is performed, and the special figure 2 display processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit in step A765 (step A765; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787) and the small hit flag 2 is small When it is determined to be a hit (step A 787; Y), it is determined whether or not the high probability final change is in progress (step A 788).

  Then, if it is determined in step A 788 that the high probability final fluctuation is being performed (step A 788; Y), the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game is the normal probability state ( The probability information command related to the information to be in the low probability state) is prepared (step A 789), and the rendering command setting process (step A 790) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step A791), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A 792). In addition, step A 792 assumes a mode in which a right-handed command notification is made in the high probability state, and since the high-probability state is determined as the high-probability final variation, the right-handed command notification flag is cleared. It is illustrated. However, if the present embodiment is a mode that does not issue a right-handed command notification in the high probability state, step A792 deletes the configuration (or left-handed command notification in the high probability state and performs the left-handed command notification in step A792 There may be an aspect in which the flag is cleared).

  Next, when step A 792 is finished and when the high probability final change is not in progress (step A 788; N), the command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A 793), effect command setting processing (step Do A794). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A795), and the effect command setting process (step A796) It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be hit to the left (for example, a state that is not in the general power support state, the jackpot, or the special mode) (step A 797).

  If it is determined in step A 797 that the predetermined state is to be left-handed (step A 797; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 798). The signal relating to the left-handed command is, for example, a signal for turning off the shooting position designation signal 1. Next, in order to extinguish the display LED in the right strike, the number in the left strike state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A799), and the process proceeds to step A803.

  When the process proceeds to step A 803, the information on the special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A 803), the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 804), and the process shifts to step A 807 .

  If it transfers to step A807, special figure 2 small hitting fanfare medium middle processing migration processing setting processing (step A807) is done, the special figure 2 display processing is ended. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, a process to save "7" as the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area, small hit fanfare time in the special figure 2 game process timer area (for example, 4 ms) Processing etc) to save

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A787 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A787; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A808).
Then, if it is determined in step A808 that the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A808; Y), the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game is a normal probability state ( The probability information command related to the information to be in the low probability state) is prepared (step A809), and the rendering command setting process (step A810) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step A811), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A812), it is determined whether or not the special view 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit (step A813). Note that step A 812 is merely an example assuming a mode in which a right-handed indication is issued in the high probability state, as in the above-described step A 792.

  Next, when it is determined that the special view 1 variation display game is not a big hit (step A 813; N), the signal related to the left hitting instruction (fire position designation signal 1 is off) is saved in the test signal output data area ( Step A814) In order to turn off the display LED during the right hitting, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A815). In the present embodiment, when the special view 1 variation display game is in the middle of a big hit, it is in a state to hit the right with the big winning opening (special variation winning device 38) opened at that time, If the special figure 1 is in the middle of a big hit (step A 813; Y), it passes steps A 814 and A 815 and shifts to step A 816. Further, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 is not big hit (step A 813; N) (including the case where the special figure 1 is small hit), the process proceeds to step A 816 after performing steps A 814 and A 815. However, the processing content regarding such a right-handed-left-handling changes depending on the board configuration and game characteristics of the gaming machine, and is merely an example. Here, also when step A815 ends, the process proceeds to step A816.

  And if it transfers to step A816, the information which shows during special figure 2 fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation display game being executed) in the special figure status area in RWM is cleared (information subtraction) (step A816), special figure 2 game The process number relating to the special figure 2 normal process, that is, "0" is saved in the process number area (step A817), and the special figure 2 display process is ended. When step A 816 is executed, the special view status is in a state in which only the special view 1 is in a change state, or the special view 1 or the special view 2 is not in a change state.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S78) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 48 is a second diagram of the external information editing process according to the first embodiment.

  In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S72), winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S67), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S76) and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S77) Based on the information collecting terminal, external equipment such as the game arcade internal control device, and information to be output to the test shot testing device are created and set in the output buffer.

  In the external information editing process, first, information is set in accordance with an error state or a security state. In the process of setting information according to the error state or the security state, the door / frame is in the process of setting the glass frame opening error (step C71; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is being generated (step C72; Y) The on data of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

  On the other hand, when neither glass frame open error nor main frame open error occurs (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C75) Save the off data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step C76).

  Next, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch, etc. is not "0", the "-1" is updated. (Step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78).

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, if the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78; Y), that is, if the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, from the time when the security signal control timer saves the initial value (for example, 256 ms) to the initialization of the data stored in the RAM in the main process described above and until the security signal control timer times out The on data of the security signal is output as external information.

  Next, during magnet fraud (step C80; Y), during board radio wave fraud (step C81; Y), during frame radio wave fraud (step C82; Y), during big winning opening fraud (step C83; Y) Or when special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurs (step C84; Y), save ON data of security signal in external information output data area (step C85), test signal output of ON data of gaming machine error status signal Save in the data area (step C86). Even in the case where the common electric power is fraudulent, similarly, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86) It is good also as composition.

  On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, common electric power fraud, big winning prize fraud, or special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred (step C80 to C84; N), switch abnormality 1 or It is judged whether the switch abnormality 2 of switch abnormality 2 is occurring or not (step C87). If no switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is output as a test signal Save in the data area (step C88).

  Then, if any switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C86). Here, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation, switch abnormality and the like are abnormalities monitored in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, after finishing step C86 or C88, in the external information editing process, the winning signal (starting opening 1 signal) of starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36 which is the starting winning opening of special figure 1 and normal fluctuation winning device 37) Start opening 1 signal editing process (step C89) to edit the winning signal (starting opening 2 signal) of starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92 which is the starting winning opening of special figure 2) starting opening 2 A signal editing process (step C90) is performed. Subsequently, main prize ball signal editing processing (step C91) is performed to edit the main prize ball signal related to the prize ball number to be paid out, and the symbol determination number signal is generated based on the symbol determination number output number (pattern determination number signal output number). The symbol determination frequency signal editing process (step C92) is performed to edit the, and the external information editing process is ended.

[Main processing]
Next, the main processing of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits an interrupt.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial setting of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit initializes the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits an interrupt.

  [Step D15] The control unit permits display data generation. That is, the control unit accesses a display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and permits generation of display data.

  [Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is processing for setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the srand function, or uses a value created based on the ID value of the CPU etc. so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may

  [Step D17] The control unit is an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, the RAM 322) of the effect control apparatus 300 (for example, a flag area for effect (storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control apparatus 300)). Save the initial value at power on.

[Step D18] The control unit clears WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes effect button input processing. The effect button input process is a process for performing editing when the effect button (the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b) is operated when it is activated. In addition, since the effect button is not turned on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform processing for detecting input of the effect button within the effect button input processing, or may be performed within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

  [Step D20] The control unit executes hall / player setting mode processing. The hall / player setting mode process is a process for receiving operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as the brightness of the LED and the display device 41 and the volume, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

  [Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. The random number update process is, for example, a process of updating the pseudo random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process using the rand function. Since the rand function generates random numbers based on the specified generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain random numbers only by executing the rand function. In addition, you may use the counter which increments by "1" like a main board | substrate (game control apparatus 100) as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes reception command check processing. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table in the effect display editing process.

  [Step D <b> 24] The control unit performs setting for ending drawing command preparation. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that preparation of all the commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is ended.

  [Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is frame switching timing, and if it is frame switching timing, the process proceeds to Step D26, and if it is not frame switching timing, it waits for frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to the processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds3333.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sync interrupt). It is the timing which arrives at a regular interval. The V blank interrupt is generated each time one scan of the entire screen for drawing is completed by the VDP 312. The generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 seconds, as described above. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt is generated twice, frame switching is performed, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 seconds). (For example, 1/30 seconds ≒ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this aspect, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image updating) may be performed in a cycle of 1/30 seconds or more, or less than 1/30 seconds Frame switching may be performed in a cycle.

  As a result of the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D30 and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is performed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle. In addition, time management which needs to be synchronized with the effect contents is performed in units of this frame (that is, in units of the processing cycle). In the case where the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, it becomes 100 ms in 3 frames. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

  [Step D26] The control unit instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen in accordance with the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table form, and instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen.

  [Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of audio from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes a decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process of controlling various LEDs and the like such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes movable body control processing. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body (for example, the board effect device 44) including various motors and SOL (solenoid).

  [Step D30] The control unit executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets launch related information based on the launch state flag, and effects according to the special view rotation state (the number of special figure fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of lent balls)). Is a process for performing mode correction of

[Step D31] The control unit executes an information disclosure process. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing to the player performance information on gaming performance.
After executing step D31, the control unit returns to step D18, and thereafter repeatedly executes the processes of step D18 to step D31. That is, steps D18 to D31 constitute loop processing (sometimes referred to as main loop processing) that is repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after activation of the effect control device 300.

  The control unit executes the processing of step D27 to step D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the effect of the screen, but the signals and data generated or set by these control processing (in particular, various LEDs and motors) The process of actually outputting the drive control signal etc.) to the port is performed within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). However, when using an IC specialized for control of various devices, there is also a case where the output of a signal or the like is not performed by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the reception command check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of reception command check processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The reception command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

  The reception command (rendering command) is configured to include MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the game control device (main board) 100 sends a rendering command to the rendering control device 300. Are sent sequentially. Below, such data which comprises a command is called data of command or command data.

  Further, the processing of command reception from the main board is performed by "command reception interrupt processing" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when reception of a command is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified. It is only necessary to take out from the buffer, but in the above-mentioned "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking the loaded command data for abnormality, the relevant command Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and updating is performed to increase the value of the command reception counter by “1” by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, simply “store” means to readably store in a predetermined storage area so as to be used for the later control process (the same applies to the following). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. The command buffer is constituted of, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311 a (or the RAM 322) of the CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be equal to or more than the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in a system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 seconds).

  [Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is set in the RWM (the RAM 322 or the RAM 311 a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the command reception counter stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) (time for one cycle of the above processing cycle).

  [Step D42] The control unit determines whether the number of received commands is not “0 (zero)”. If the number of received commands is not “0”, the process proceeds to Step D43, and the number of received commands is “0”. For example, the reception command check process ends. In the present application, “loading data” in the control processing means extracting data from the RAM (the RAM 322 or the RAM 311 a in the effect control device 300 of this example) as in the step D41.

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
Here, assuming that A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after the execution of step D41. Then, it is a normal movement that “A = A−B = 0” immediately after execution of step D43, but in the aspect of this example, the effect control device 300 interrupts the command reception from the game control device (main substrate) 100. Since the priority is given to the highest priority without disabling the interrupt, there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the process of step D41 and the process of step D43. Therefore, if the process in step D43 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process for setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count is shifted, so in step D43, the subtraction process “A−B” is performed. I am doing. However, when serial communication is used to transmit / receive a command from the main board as in this embodiment, the value of A is not increased between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153 by disabling interrupts. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be "A.rarw.0".

  [Step D44] The control unit determines the contents of the reception command buffer (corresponding to a command buffer, hereinafter may be simply referred to as a command buffer) (that is, command data stored in an address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to a command area (sometimes called a command storage area). The command area is, for example, in a storage area in the RAM 322 or RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO (first-in first-out) buffer.

  [Step D45] Since the controller reads the data in the command buffer, the controller increments the value of the command read index, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, by, eg, 1 in the range of 0 to 31. Do. Here, the range of “0” to “31” corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, “32”).

  [Step D46] The control unit determines whether copying of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (ie, whether steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copying is not completed.

  [Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (the first stored data among the unread data in the command area, that is, the data to be read next) Do.

  [Step D48] The control unit executes reception command analysis processing. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing data of a loaded command (hereinafter, referred to as a current command). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the command reception number has not been completed, and ends the reception command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of received command analysis processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

  [Step D51] The control unit separates the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in Step D47 of the received command check process into MODE, and stores the lower byte into ACT. In the case of a variable system command instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands a first half variation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands a second variation pattern It is a thing.

  [Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in Step D51 is in the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D53 when the value of MODE is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the value of MODE is not in the normal range. Note that the value of MODE is not defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that the value is not within the normal range.

  [Step D53] The control unit determines whether the value of ACT separated in Step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the value of ACT is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the value of ACT is not in the normal range.

  Further, whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 in step D53 is in the normal range is performed, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value is different for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of this ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown). It is checked whether the value of the ACT is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined that the range is normal (at this point in time, the missing part check described later has not been completed).

  [Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the value of ACT separated from the value of MODE separated is a correct combination. The control unit proceeds to step D55 if the value of ACT is a correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process if the combination is not a correct combination. The determination of whether or not the value of ACT is a correct combination can be made, for example, using a match check table. In the match check table, all valid ACT values (action values) for the value of MODE are registered in order from the top address, and are provided for each value of MODE. Then, if there is a value of ACT separated in the match check table corresponding to the value of MODE, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no value of ACT separated in the match check table, it is correct It can be determined that it is not a combination.

  The determination as to whether or not the value of ACT is a correct combination is executed including a missing tooth check as to whether or not the combination of ACT is a normal combination of ACT. Because there is a plurality of valid ACTs for one MODE, but their values are not continuous (that is, values that do not exist discontinuously or have missing values), the command We are comparing and checking if is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, one of them is compared and checked one by one.

  [Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the variation system command range. The control unit executes variable system command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the variation system command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the data of MODE is not within the variation system command range. .

  Here, the data of MODE is data of MODE stored separately in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 described later). A variation system command (also referred to as a variation command or variation pattern command) is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, and the range that can be taken by data of this variation command is a variation system command range.

  [Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the big hit system command range. The control unit executes big hit system command processing (details omitted) when the data of MODE is within the big hit system command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the data of MODE is not within the big hit system command range. . The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (a display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) relating to a big hit medium effect, and the range which can be taken by the data of the big hit system command is a big hit system command range.

  [Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol system command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the symbol system command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the data of MODE is not within the symbol system command range. . A symbol system command (sometimes referred to as a symbol command or a decoration special figure command) is a command for instructing information on a special figure symbol (for example, what to make the stop figure of the special figure, etc.), this symbol command The range that the data of can take is the symbol system command range.

  [Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the one-shot system command range. The control unit executes one-shot system command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the one-shot system command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the data of MODE is not within the one-shot system command range. . In addition, unlike a command that makes sense in combination like a symbol command and a variable system command, a command that stands alone is referred to as a one-shot system command. The one-shot commands (sometimes referred to as single-shot commands) include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. The range that can be taken by the data of this one-shot command is the one-shot system command range.

  [Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the prefetch symbol system command range. The control unit executes pre-reading symbol system command processing (details omitted) when the data of MODE is within the pre-reading symbol system command range (step D64), and when the data of MODE is not within the pre-reading symbol system command range Go to D65.

  [Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the prefetch change command range. The control unit executes the prefetch variation system command processing (details omitted) when the data of MODE is within the prefetch variation system command range (step D66), and receives the data when the mode data is not within the prefetch variation system command range. Terminates command analysis processing.

  The pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading fluctuation system command are commands for pre-reading effect. In addition, when the process in any one of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 ends, the reception command analysis process ends.

  Here, the pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to start winning memory (no start winning memory hold or just hold) for which the variable display game of the special drawing is not executed. In order to inform the player in advance with a predetermined degree of reliability whether or not it will be a big hit when it is subsequently executed (or what fluctuation pattern it will be), the display of start winning memory storage etc. And so on. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the retention of the starting winning a prize memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

  Next, an information disclosure function that enables the user to feel the setting information without excessive gambling will be described using FIG. 52 to FIG. First, the outline of the information disclosure function will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of an outline of the information disclosure function of the first embodiment.

  The game control device 100 includes a set value change switch (set value change SW) 126 to allow change of the set value of the game performance. The set value is from "0" to "5", and the hit probability of the special figure game can be changed in six steps. In addition, the game control apparatus 100 includes the probability setting value display device 136, and can confirm the setting value set using the setting value change switch 126 by numerical display of “0” to “5”.

  Since the game control apparatus 100 includes the setting value change switch 126 and the probability setting value display device 136 on the game control board, and the game control apparatus 100 is provided on the back side of the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 There is virtually no opportunity to be observed by the player of. In addition, although the game control device 100 transmits various commands to the effect control device 300, the game control device 100 does not transmit information to the effect value to the effect control device 300 by including information on setting values in the various commands. As a result, the gaming machine 10 eliminates the opportunity to confirm the set value other than the game control apparatus 100, and prevents the set value leakage.

  The effect control device 300 does not receive a command including information related to the set value from the game control device 100, but receives various commands involved in the game progress according to the set value. The effect control device 300 stores the game history in the FeRAM 323 based on the received various commands. Since the FeRAM 323 is a non-volatile storage unit, the gaming history of a predetermined period can be accumulated without losing even when the power is turned off. The effect control device 300 calculates game performance from the accumulated game history.

  The effect control device 300 includes the push button 25. The push button 25 is an operation unit capable of receiving an operation input, and includes the selection button switch 25 a and the determination button switch 25 b described with reference to FIG. 4. Here, the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25 a and the determination button switch 25 b are signals detected by a combination of a detection signal of the touch sensor and a detection signal of the push button SW. For example, the state in which the touch sensor detects a touch operation corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW detects a press operation on the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. The state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b. The option setting unit 25 is hereinafter referred to as a push button or PB (Push Button). The effect control device 300 can cause the player to select the display content of the performance information related to the gaming performance of the gaming machine 10 or to select the notification opportunity of the performance information by the operation input by the push button 25.

  The effect control device 300 can display the calculated performance information on the display device 41 with the default display content or the selected display content. Further, the effect control device 300 can display the calculated performance information on the display device 41 at the default notification opportunity or the selected notification opportunity. The display device 41 is a form of informing means, and the effect control device 300 is another effect means (for example, the speakers 19a and 19b, the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, the board effect device 44, and the like). A sub display device, an LED, etc. can be used as a notification means.

  As a result, the effect control device 300 can disclose the performance information as a performance value according to the operation of the gaming machine 10, and as a result, makes it possible to sense the setting information. In addition, since the effect control device 300 does not directly disclose information related to the setting value to the player, the effect control device 300 does not excessively enjoy gambling. Further, since the effect control device 300 does not receive information on the setting value from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 does not leak the setting value to the outside. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to sense the setting information without excessive gambling.

  Next, the information disclosure process performed by the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the information disclosure process of the first embodiment. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance according to the setting value without the effect control device 300 acquiring information on the setting value from the game control device 100. The information disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The information disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D31 (see FIG. 49) of the main process.

  [Step D71] The control unit executes setting processing. The setting process is a process of accepting the operation of a player (which may be a manager or the like) and setting the disclosure content. The setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

[Step D72] The control unit executes a collection process. The collecting process is a process of collecting a game history. The collection process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.
[Step D73] The control unit executes a tabulation process. The counting process is a process of calculating (counting) the game performance from the collected game history. The aggregation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60.

  [Step D74] The control unit executes output information editing processing. The output information editing process is a process of editing the calculated game performance output mode. The output information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D75] The control unit executes an in-game disclosure process. The in-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance during the game (special game) in the edited output mode. The in-game disclosing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D76] The control unit executes an in-game disclosure process, and ends the information disclosure process after the in-game disclosure process is performed. The non-game in-progress disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance other than during the game (special game) in the edited output mode. The non-in-game disclosure process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, setting processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of setting processing of the first embodiment. The setting process is a process of accepting the player's operation and setting the disclosure content. The setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D71 of the information disclosure process.

  [Step D81] The control unit determines whether it is time to accept setting. The setting acceptance timing is a timing that is set in advance as a timing at which the setting operation can be accepted, and for example, a customer waiting state is set as a timing that does not affect the progress of the game. The control unit proceeds to step D82 when the setting acceptance timing is reached, and ends the setting process when the setting acceptance timing is not reached.

[Step D82] The control unit causes the display device 41 to display a setting screen. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can guide the setting operation according to the display content to the player.
[Step D83] The control unit sets an aggregation period in accordance with the setting operation. The aggregation period is a period to be aggregated among the periods in which the history is collected (history collection period). The control unit sets the aggregation period so as to enable selection as to whether all of the history collection periods are to be aggregation periods or a part of the history collection periods to be aggregation periods. In addition, when a part of the history collection period is used as the aggregation period, the control unit can set the size of the period, which is either the beginning and the end or the beginning and the end. Thereby, the control unit can set the period desired by the player as the aggregation period.

  [Step D84] The control unit sets output information in accordance with the setting operation. The output information is performance information to be output among the calculated performance information. The control unit sets the output information such that it is possible to select whether all the calculated performance information is to be output or a part of the calculated performance information is to be output. Thereby, the control unit can output performance information desired by the player.

  [Step D85] The control unit sets a filter in accordance with the setting operation. The filter filters the calculated performance information according to the game state. The control unit sets a filter so as to select whether to output all of the gaming states for the calculated performance information or to output a specific gaming state for the calculated performance information. As a result, the control unit can output performance information in the gaming state desired by the player.

  [Step D86] The control unit requests the player to confirm the setting contents, and when the player confirms the setting contents, the process proceeds to Step D87, and the setting is performed when the player does not confirm the setting contents (for example, cancels). End the process.

  [Step D87] The control unit updates the setting with the content accepted by the setting operation, and ends the setting process. The control unit may set a valid period (for example, 3 hours) in the updated setting content, and return to the default setting after the valid period has elapsed. Further, the control unit may set a default setting return condition (for example, transition to a customer waiting state) to the updated setting content, and may return to the default setting after the condition is satisfied.

Next, the display screen of the display device 41 in the setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the setting screen of the first embodiment.
The display screen 350 shown in FIG. 55 (1) is a display screen displayed in step D82. The display screen 350 includes the title of the setting screen and the guidance of the setting operation in the display content. For example, the display screen 350 displays “setting inference assist” as a title of the setting screen, and displays operation guidance using the push button 25 as guidance of setting operation.

  The display screen 351 shown in FIG. 55 (2) is a display screen displayed in step D83. The display screen 351 is a display screen during setting of the aggregation period, and includes in the display content a title and an option during the aggregation period setting. For example, the display screen 351 displays "set aggregation period" as a title during aggregation period setting, and selects "1. whole period", "2. fluctuation period event", "3. fluctuation period" as options during aggregation period setting. Display “Timer” and “4. User setting of fluctuation period”. Further, the display screen 351 displays the option being selected among the options being set in the aggregation period so as to be distinguishable from other options. For example, the display screen 351 indicates that the option “4. fluctuation period user setting” is underlined by being selected.

  Note that the option “1. whole period” is an option that counts all periods in the accumulated history information. The option “2. fluctuation period event” is an option to set a predetermined event trigger of accumulated history information as the start and end, or the start or end. The option “3. fluctuation period timer” is an option to set a predetermined timer trigger of accumulated history information as the start and end, or the start or end. The option “4. fluctuation period user setting” is an option in which the user sets one of the start and end of the accumulated history information or one of the start and end (the other is default).

  The display screen 352 shown in FIG. 55 (3) is a display screen when “4. fluctuation period user setting” is selected as an option during aggregation period setting. The display screen 352 is a display screen during option setting in the option “4. fluctuation period user setting”, and includes in the display content a title during option setting in the option “4. fluctuation period user setting” and the option setting content. For example, the display screen 352 displays "variation period user setting" as a title in option setting, and selects an aggregation range selected from among the history information accumulated as option setting contents (from "here" shown by hatching in the figure) Display the range of "To here".

  The display screen 353 shown in FIG. 55 (4) is a display screen displayed in step D84. The display screen 353 is a display screen in which the output information is set, and includes, in the display content, the title in the output information set and the options. For example, the display screen 353 displays “output information setting” as a title during output information setting, and displays “1. probability per 1.” and “2. corresponding setting value” as options during output information setting. Further, the display screen 353 displays the option being selected among the options in the setting of the output information so as to be distinguishable from the other options. For example, the display screen 353 indicates that the option “1. probability” is underlined to be selected. The selection during the setting of the output information may be made by exclusively selecting an option, or by simultaneously selecting two or more options.

  Here, the option “1. hit probability” is an option in which the hit probability in the special figure game (the combination probability of the special figure game 1 or the special figure game 2 or the respective probabilities) is used as output information. The option “2. corresponding setting value” is an option having, as output information, a setting value (estimated value) corresponding to the hit probability.

  The display screen 354 shown in FIG. 55 (5) is a display screen displayed in step D85. The display screen 354 is a display screen during filter setting, and includes the title and options in the filter setting in the display content. For example, the display screen 354 displays "filter setting" as a title in filter setting, and "1. all modes", "2. mode A", "3. mode B", "4" as options in filter setting. “Mode C”, “5. low probability”, “6. high probability”, “7. power support”, and “8. non power support” are displayed. In addition, the display screen 354 displays the option being selected among the options in the filter setting so as to be distinguishable from other options. For example, the display screen 354 indicates that the option "6. High probability" is underlined to be selected.

  Note that the option “1. All mode” is an option that targets all of the effect modes (or probability states) in the special figure game as output information. The options “2. mode A”, “3. mode B”, and “4. mode C” are options for setting the corresponding rendering mode in the rendering mode in the special figure game as the target of the output information. The option “5. low probability” is an option that sets the low probability state as the target of the output information among the probability states of the special figure game. The option “6. high probability” is an option for which the high probability state is a target of the output information among the probability states of the special figure game. The option “7. Power support” is a selection that targets the status (power support) with the power support in the power support state of the special figure game as the target of the output information. The option “8. non-electric support” is an option that targets the state without general power support (non-electric support) in the general-power support state of the special figure game as the target of the output information.

  The display screen 355 shown in FIG. 55 (6) is a display screen displayed in step D86. The display screen 355 is a display screen for confirming the setting content, and includes, in the display content, a title during the confirmation of the setting content and an option for the setting content confirmation. For example, the display screen 355 displays "Confirmation of setting content" as a title during confirmation of setting content, and displays "OK" and "Cancel" as options during confirmation of setting content.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can disclose information desired by the player.
Next, collection processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of collection processing according to the first embodiment. The collecting process is a process of collecting a game history. The collection process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The collection process is a process executed by the control unit in step D72 of the information disclosure process.

  [Step D91] The control unit determines whether or not there is a game history reset instruction. The game history reset instruction is desirably input by the administrator, and is, for example, an operation input of the RAM initialization switch 112 of the game control apparatus 100. The control unit proceeds to step D92 when there is a game history reset instruction, and proceeds to step D95 when there is no game history reset instruction.

[Step D92] The control unit clears the game history storage area (game history storage area). For example, the control unit clears the game history stored in the FeRAM 323 to zero.
[Step D93] The control unit generates dummy data of the game history. The dummy data is data for preventing calculation of gaming performance greatly deviated from the design value when the gaming history is small, and is generated based on, for example, the average gaming performance of all setting values. The dummy data may be prepared in advance.

[Step D94] The control unit stores the generated dummy data in the game history storage area.
[Step D95] The control unit determines whether or not a command (target command) including information to be collected as a game history has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D96 when the target command is received, and ends the collection process when the target command is not received.

[Step D96] The control unit acquires event information when the target command is received.
[Step D97] The control unit acquires the gaming state when the target command is received. The game state to be acquired is the game state used for filtering the target of the output information, and includes, for example, the type of effect mode, the probability state of the special figure game, and the general power support state of the special figure game.

  [Step D98] The control unit associates the information to be the collection target of the gaming history with the gaming state when the target command is received, and stores the information as the gaming history in the gaming history storage area. The game history storage area is, for example, a ring buffer, and can store the latest game history for a predetermined period by overwriting old data with new data. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can accumulate gaming history of a predetermined period including dummy data. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can accumulate gaming history corresponding to the operation status by replacing the dummy data with the gaming history.

Next, the gaming history stored in the gaming history storage area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram of an example of collected data according to the first embodiment.
The control unit sets a game history to be stored as a single event of one time of symbol variation of the special figure game detected from the target command and a single hit of the special figure game. The control unit assigns an event ID (ID) for each event and records an event type (type) and an event occurrence time (time). Further, the control unit records, for each event, the probability state (probability fluctuation) of the special figure game of the event occurrence, the general power support state (power support) of the special figure game, and the type of effect mode (effect mode).

  For example, the game history of ID "xxx 111" is of type "variation (pattern variation), time" t xxx 111 ", the gaming state at the time of the event occurrence is probability variation" high (high probability) " Power support state) "indicates that the effect mode is" A ". In addition, the game history of ID “xxx 211” is type “variation”, time “txxx 211”, the gaming state at the time of the event occurrence probability variation “low (low probability)”, power support “presence”, effect mode “A To indicate that In addition, the game history of ID “xxx311” is type “variation”, time “txxx311”, the gaming state at the time of event occurrence is probability variation “low”, power support “none (non-power support state)”, effect Indicates that the mode is "B". In addition, the game history of ID "xxx 701" is type "hit (big hit), time" txxx 701 ", the gaming state at the time of the event occurrence probability variation"-(undefined) ", power support"-", effects Indicates that the mode is "-". In addition, regarding the event of the type "hit", the control unit triggered the hit occurrence by referring to the game state at the occurrence of the event of the type "variation" immediately before, even if the gaming state at the time of the event occurrence is undefined. The game state of the variable display can be specified.

  Next, the tabulation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of tallying processing according to the first embodiment. The tabulation process is a process of calculating the gaming performance from the collected gaming history. The aggregation process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The aggregation process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the information disclosure process.

  [Step D101] The control unit determines whether it is time to count. The control unit sets the timing when the processing resource of the effect control device 300 has a margin as the aggregation timing. For example, the control unit sets the symbol stop time after the symbol change as the aggregation timing when the game is not in progress (the customer wait state or the like) or during the game. The control unit proceeds to step D102 when the aggregation timing is reached, and ends the aggregation processing when the aggregation timing is not reached.

[Step D102] The control unit acquires an aggregation period according to the setting.
[Step D103] The control unit counts the gaming histories in the counting period among the gaming histories stored in the gaming history storage area for each gaming state.

[Step D104] The control unit stores the counting result (counting data) in the output information storage area (FeRAM 323) and ends the counting process.
Next, aggregated data stored in the output information storage area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of the aggregated data according to the first embodiment. The user setting period aggregation data shown in FIG. 59 is aggregation data obtained by aggregating the game history within the aggregation period set by the user among the gaming histories stored in the gaming history storage area.

  The user setting period total data includes a hitting probability for each gaming state and a corresponding setting value. The game state to be separately counted in the user setting period total data, "during low probability,-(do not matter regardless of the general power support state)," during low probability, with power support "," during low probability, without power support ", There are "in high probability-," "in high probability, with power support" and "in high probability with no power support". In addition, the effect modes that are individually summarized in the user setting period total data include "all mode", "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C". For example, in the game state "low probability-," the hit probability "1/210" and the corresponding setting value "3" are used as the aggregation result. Note that the corresponding setting value is an estimated value of the setting value, and a setting value having game performance (hit probability) close to the hit probability “1/210” is selected as the aggregation result.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can perform tallying according to the gaming state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform the counting depending on the gaming state, even if the number of data is insufficient, by performing the counting according to the gaming state. For example, in the gaming machine 10, even if the number of data of the number of hits is not sufficiently obtained during the low probability, the number of data of the number of hits may be sufficiently obtained during the high probability. Further, since the gaming machine 10 tabulates for each of a plurality of gaming states or a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to provide a tabulated result that the player believes regardless of the authenticity of the tabulated result. For example, the gaming machine 10 can give a high degree of satisfaction to the player who believes that the effect mode “mode A” is the counting result correctly reflecting the gaming machine performance. Such mistakes of the player are corrected in the process of converging to the true value together with the data accumulation, and the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with the convergence process to the true value as a new interest.

  In addition, although user setting period total data was demonstrated, it can be made the same about total data of total periods other than this. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may aggregate the aggregation data of another aggregation period in parallel when aggregating aggregation data of one aggregation period, or one aggregation to save processing resources. When aggregating aggregated data of a period, aggregated data of other aggregation periods may not be aggregated.

  It should be noted that since the result of aggregation that is too misleading can confuse the player, the gaming machine 10 can set the minimum amount of information for the aggregation data. Next, securing of the minimum information amount of aggregated data will be described using FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of securing the minimum amount of information in the tabulated data of the first embodiment.

  FIG. 60 (1) shows tally data securing the minimum amount of information when using historical data as tally data. Since the history information on the day exceeds the minimum amount of information, all of it is used as aggregation data. The minimum amount of information is a threshold set in advance.

  Next, when making historical information into tally data, tally data without securing the minimum information amount is shown in FIG. 60 (2). Since the history information on the day does not exceed the minimum amount of information, the shortage is supplemented with dummy data. The amount of dummy data to be replenished can be reduced by the increase of historical information on the day.

  Another example, tabulated data on the day when historical information is used as tabulated data, the tabulated data for which the minimum amount of information is not secured is shown in FIG. Since the history information on the current day does not exceed the minimum amount of information, the shortage is supplemented with history information on the previous day. The amount of the previous day's history information to be replenished can be reduced by the increase of the history information on the day.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure the minimum amount of information for the aggregation data, and can suppress the risk of presenting the player with the wrong aggregation result.
Next, the output information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of output information editing processing according to the first embodiment. The output information editing process is a process of editing the calculated game performance output mode. The output information editing process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The output information editing process is a process executed by the control unit in step D74 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D111] The control unit acquires the counting result of the counting process.
[Step D112] The control unit acquires the setting content set in the setting process.
[Step D113] The control unit determines an output content (output mode) from among the aggregation results according to the setting content.

  [Step D114] The control unit determines the output timing of the output content in accordance with the setting content or the game state, and ends the output information editing process. For example, the control unit determines at which timing the output content is to be output depending on whether or not a game is being played, if it is being played, whether it is fluctuating or not. More specifically, the control unit can determine the prompt output timing when not playing. In addition, the control unit can determine an output timing waiting for establishment of an output condition to be set in advance, during the game. The output conditions set in advance are in consideration of the matching with the game effect and the influence on the game progress. For example, when the control unit is in a variable display mode, the timing of occurrence of an effect (for example, a speech effect for a character) that can be replaced with the output content, or an effect (for example, a cut-in effect or the like) Can be determined as the output timing. In addition, if the control unit is in a hit, the output timing can be the timing of occurrence of an effect (for example, interval effect etc.) that can be replaced with the output content or an effect (for example, ending effect etc.) permitted to overlap with the output content. It can be decided.

  Next, in-game disclosure processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of in-game disclosure processing according to the first embodiment. The in-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance during the game (special game) in the edited output mode. The in-game disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The in-game disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D75 of the information disclosure process.

  [Step D121] The control unit determines whether or not the information disclosure enable timing is on the basis of the output timing determined in Step D114 of the output information editing process. The control unit proceeds to step D122 when the information disclosure enable timing is reached, and ends the in-game disclosure process when the information disclosure enabled timing is not reached.

  [Step D122] The control unit determines whether or not an information disclosure lottery has been won. The control unit proceeds to step D123 and thereafter to perform information disclosure when a lottery for information disclosure is won. On the other hand, when the control unit does not win the information disclosure lottery, the control unit ends the in-game disclosure process without performing the information disclosure.

  As described above, the control unit does not necessarily disclose information even at the information disclosure enable timing, and performs information disclosure only when a lottery is won. Note that the control unit suppresses frequent information disclosure in the game by disclosing information at a draw probability of "less than 1" at a distributable timing (for example, in reach effect in a variable display game) in the game. In addition, the control unit responds to the player's disclosure request by disclosing information at the drawable probability of “1” at the distributable timing (for example, while waiting for a customer) during non-game.

[Step D123] The control unit acquires the output content determined in Step D113 of the output information editing process.
[Step D124] The control unit selects an effect pattern according to the output content. For example, the control unit selects one from one or more selectable effect patterns (for example, cut-in, serif of characters, etc.) prepared in advance.

[Step D125] The control unit enables the notification unit to output the selected effect pattern and sets it, and ends the in-game disclosure process.
Next, the information disclosure effect of the gaming machine 10 will be described using FIG. 63 and FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of an information disclosure screen according to the first embodiment. FIG. 64 is a second diagram illustrating an example of the information disclosure screen according to the first embodiment.

  The display screen 500 shown in FIG. 63 (1) is a display screen during symbol stop, and the symbol is stopped and displayed before the start of change in the variable display game. The display screen 500 displays a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 pending number indication 503, a special figure 2 pending number indication 504, a pending indication 505, and a pending digest indication 506.

  The large symbol group 501 takes charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 501 is displayed in a large size by setting the variable display area in the approximate center of the display device 41. Large symbol group 501 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol.

  In the display screen 500, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", the middle symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the right symbol is "7". Indicates that it has stopped. That is, in the display screen 500, the large symbol group 501 indicates that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state (during symbol suspension).

  The small symbol group 502 is in charge of reporting of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 502 is smallly displayed on the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 501. The small symbol group 502 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. In the display screen 500, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in a stopped state.

  In general, the large symbol group 501 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 502, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be largely changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 502 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 501, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, position fixing).

  A special figure 1 pending number display 503 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 1 game. In the display screen 500, the special view 1 suspension number display 503 indicates that the number of suspension storages of the special view 1 game is “4”. The special figure 2 pending number display 504 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. In the display screen 500, the special figure 2 pending number display 504 indicates that the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game is “0”. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 505 corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 503 and the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 504.

  For example, as shown in the display screen 500, when the special figure 1 pending number display 503 displays "4" and the special figure 2 pending number display 504 displays "0", the pending display 505 displays four pending storage displays Indicates that the number of pending storages is "4".

  The hold display 505 can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view variable display game and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result for each held memory according to the display mode (hold display displayed on the hold display 505).

  The holding and digest display 506 can indicate whether or not the special view variable display game is in the variable display state and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode. In the display screen 500, the holding and digesting display 506 blanks the inside of the frame to indicate that the special-image variation display game is stopped. After this, the gaming machine 10 starts the variable display.

  The display screen 510 shown in FIG. 63 (2) is a display screen after the variable display has been started. The display screen 510 is a screen after the display screen 500, and shows a screen during variation display (during three symbol variation). On the display screen 510, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 501 are fluctuating, and it is shown that the special symbol fluctuation display game is being variably displayed. In addition, on the display screen 510, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, and it is shown that the special figure fluctuation display game is being variably displayed.

  In the display screen 510, the special view 1 reserve number display 503 indicates that the reserve reserve number for the special figure 1 game is "3", and the special view 2 reserve number display 504 indicates that the reserve reserve number for the special figure 2 game is It shows that it is "0", and the hold display 505 shows that the number of holding memories of the special figure variation display game is "3". Further, on the display screen 510, the holding and digesting display 506 displays the pending storage display during digestion, and indicates that the special view fluctuation display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

  The display screen 511 shown in FIG. 63 (3) is a display screen when the reach effect is generated after the start of the variable display. The display screen 511 is a screen after the display screen 510 and shows a screen during reach variation in which the left and right symbols display “3”. The gaming machine 10 makes it possible to disclose information calculated from the gaming history upon occurrence of a predetermined effect during reach change.

  The display screen 512 shown in FIG. 63 (4) is a display screen of the cut-in effect during the reach effect. The display screen 512 is a screen after the display screen 511 and shows a screen during reach variation in which the left and right symbols display “3”. The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation with the cut-in display 513 (cut-in effect) for the variable display during the reach effect. The cut-in display 513 produces a predetermined degree of expectation with a character 514 such as a rocket and a background. In addition, the cut-in display 513 displays the disclosure information 515. For example, the disclosure information 515 includes “1/200” as the hit probability in the gaming state, the aggregation period set by the player. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can disclose information while coordinating with the game effects in the game.

  Although the gaming machine 10 includes the disclosure information 515 in the display content in the cut-in effect during the reach effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the character effect, during the development effect, during the temporary stop, during the re-variation, etc. You may be in the middle or during the stop of the design.

  The display screen 516 shown in FIG. 64 (1) is a display screen of interval effect during hitting. The display screen 516 includes the hit type display 517, the game guide 518, the round display 519, and the disclosure information 520 in the display content. The hit type display 517 indicates a hit name (for example, “X bonus”) on the effect. The game guide 518 informs the player that the batting direction is the right play area. The round display 519 displays symbols (for example, star-shaped display) corresponding to the rounds, and indicates the current number of rounds and the final number of rounds. The disclosure information 520 includes “1/210” as the winning period in the gaming state, the aggregation period set by the player. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can disclose information while coordinating with the winning game effect.

  Although the gaming machine 10 includes the disclosure information 520 as the display content in the interval effect during winning, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be during fanfare, during a round, during an end, or the like.

  The display screen 521 shown in FIG. 64 (2) is a display screen in the power transmission support (power support). The display screen 521 includes the game state display 522, the game guide 518, and the disclosure information 523 in the display content. The game state display 522 indicates a game state name (for example, "power support"). The game state display 522 may display a game effect name (for example, “mode A”). The disclosure information 523 displays the character in association with the disclosure information as “1/21” as the winning probability in the gaming state, the aggregation period set by the player. For example, a character such as tiger implies a setting (e.g. setting "2") corresponding to the hit probability "1/21".

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may perform information disclosure limited to the gaming state in addition to or in place of the setting of the player. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the display screen 521 may display the probability of hitting in the power transmission support (power support) as the disclosure information 523. Similarly, the gaming machine 10 causes the display screen 521 to display hit probability in high probability (including latent probability change), high probability (except latent probability change), and other gaming states as the disclosure information 523. May be

  In addition, in the display screen 521, the special figure 1 reserve number indication 503 indicates that the reserve figure number of the special figure 1 game is "0," and the special figure 2 reserve number indication 504 is the reserve figure memory of the special figure 2 game. Indicates that the number is "4". Note that on the display screen 521, the on-hold display 505 and the on-hold digest display 506 may be displayed in a non-display manner by giving priority to the visibility of the disclosure information 523.

  The display screen 524 shown in FIG. 64 (3) is a display screen (another example) in the power conversion support (power support). The display screen 524 includes the game state display 522, the game guide 518, and the disclosure information 525 in the display content. The game state display 522 indicates a game state name (for example, "power support"). Note that the disclosure information 525 displays a character in association with the disclosure information as "1/18" as the hit probability in the gaming state, in the aggregation period set by the player. For example, a character such as a boy suggests a setting (for example, setting "4") corresponding to the hit probability "1/18".

  The display screen 526 shown in FIG. 64 (4) is a display screen waiting for a customer. The display screen 526 includes the disclosure information 527 and the operation guide 528 in the display content. The disclosure information 527 displays "mode A" as a game effect name (may be a game state name) set by the player, and displays a hit probability "1/170" in the game effect "mode A", and a hit probability " The setting "5" is displayed as a setting corresponding to 1/170 ". The operation guide 528 displays the push button 25 corresponding to the operation unit and the operation guide. The gaming machine 10 may update the aggregation content and the display content at any time according to the received operation for information disclosure while waiting for customers.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 can also perform setting suggestion of the hit probability in addition to the character or in place of the character by background display. Next, the suggestion of setting the hit probability by the background display will be described using FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting suggestion mode according to the first embodiment.

  Background display during information disclosure has a plurality of display modes depending on the suggested setting value. The estimated setting value “0” displays the background in a white (shown by plain light) display mode. The estimated setting value “1” displays the background in a blue (shown by hatching) display mode. The estimated setting value “2” displays the background in a green (shown by cross hatching) display mode. The estimated setting value “3” displays the background in a red (shown in solid dark) display manner. The estimated setting value “4” displays the background in a petal display mode. The estimated setting value “5” displays the background in a rainbow display manner.

  Thereby, the control unit can suggest the estimated setting value with the background color of the predetermined effect display. For example, the control unit can suggest the estimated setting value “3” by setting the background display of the cut-in effect during reach effect on the display screen 512 shown in FIG. 63 (4) to a solid dark color. Note that the control unit may suggest an estimated setting value at another display location as well as the background color of the effect display. In addition, the control unit may indicate the estimated setting value by other display modes as well as the color and the pattern.

  Next, the non-game open process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the non-game in-promotion processing of the first embodiment. The non-game in-progress disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance other than during the game (special game) in the edited output mode. The non-game in-progress disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The non-game disclosed process is a process executed by the control unit in step D76 of the information disclosure process.

  [Step D131] The control unit determines whether or not there is a disclosure request operation during non-game. For example, the control unit determines that a predetermined operation input from the push button 25 waiting for a customer is a disclosure request operation during non-game. The control unit proceeds to step D132 when there is a non-game disclosure request operation, and ends the non-game disclosure processing when there is no non-game disclosure request operation.

[Step D132] The control unit receives an operation for selecting disclosure contents, such as an aggregation period, a gaming state, and display contents.
[Step D133] The control unit performs information disclosure of the aggregation data in the gaming state during the aggregation period selected by the player. For example, the control unit causes the display device 41 to disclose information.

  [Step D134] The control unit determines whether to end information disclosure. The control unit determines that a predetermined operation input from the push button 25 waiting for a customer is an information disclosure end operation. In addition, the control unit determines that the game start is the information disclosure end operation. If the control unit does not finish the information disclosure, the process proceeds to step D132 to continue the information disclosure. On the other hand, when ending the information disclosure, the control unit ends the non-game in-progress processing.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can disclose desired total data to the player even during non-game.
Next, the in-game disclosing process of the modified example will be described using FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a flowchart of in-game disclosure processing of the modification of the first embodiment. The gaming machine 10 of the modification performs information disclosure at the time of an effect (for example, a push button effect) accompanied by the reception of the player operation in the game. The in-game disclosure process of the modification is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The in-game disclosure process of the modification is a process executed by the control unit in step D75 of the information disclosure process.

  [Step D141] The control unit determines whether or not the player operation has been received during the reception time of the effect accompanied by the reception of the player operation. The control unit proceeds to step D142 when there is no reception of the player operation, and proceeds to step D143 when there is the reception of the player operation.

  [Step D142] When there is no reception of a player operation, the control unit selects a game effect pattern (non-reception effect pattern) when there is no reception of a player operation. The control unit sets the selected non-reception effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. Thus, the gaming machine 10 does not give the player an information disclosure opportunity when the player operation is not accepted. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can urge the player to participate in the game.

  [Step D143] When the player's operation has been received, the control unit draws a lottery whether to disclose information. The control unit proceeds to step D144 if it fails in the lottery for information disclosure, and proceeds to step D145 if it has won the lottery for information disclosure.

  [Step D144] When a lottery for disclosing information is failed, the control unit selects a game effect pattern (reception effect pattern) which is a game effect pattern when there is an acceptance of a player operation and does not accompany information disclosure. Do. The control unit sets the selected reception effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. Thus, the gaming machine 10 prepares the case where the player is not given the information disclosure opportunity even when the player's operation is accepted. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the value as a bonus for information disclosure and urge the player to participate in the game.

[Step D145] When a lottery for disclosing information is won, the control unit acquires the output content determined in Step D113 of the output information editing process.
[Step D146] The control unit is a game effect pattern when a player operation is accepted, and selects an effect pattern (a game effect pattern (disclosure effect pattern with information disclosure) according to the output content. The control unit sets the selected disclosing effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosing process. As described above, the gaming machine 10 gives the player an information disclosure opportunity while producing rarity even when the player's operation is accepted. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the value as a bonus for information disclosure and urge the player to participate in the game.

  The gaming performance of the gaming machine 10 may be changed by changing the setting. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 is accompanied by the power-on upon changing the setting, it is desirable that the data be totaled in history information units in a range that does not straddle the power-on if a sufficient amount of data can be secured. Further, the gaming machine 10 compares the history information before and after the power on to estimate the presence or absence of the setting change, and if the history information across the power on is estimated to have no setting change, the power is turned on. It may be regarded as history information in a range without straddling.

  Further, although the gaming machine 10 is capable of notifying a hit probability and an estimated setting value, other performance information may be notified. For example, the gaming machine 10 may report a probability change rush rate, a power support rush rate, a probability change, the number of consecutive hits in power support, the number of winning prize balls, a base, and the like.

Note that the setting for the gaming machine 10 may be performed as follows to take measures against fraud.
(1) The game control device 100 executes processing for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 at the time of setting change. This prevents the gaming machine 10 from performing game control across different setting values.

  (2) The game control device 100 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal board 71 at the time of setting change and setting confirmation. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can notify the externally connected device (for example, a hall computer or an information disclosure device such as a call lamp) that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed. The externally connected device that has received the security signal can notify that there is a setting change or setting confirmation by using notification means (a lamp, a sound (including sound), etc.). The game control apparatus 100 may output a common security signal for setting change and setting confirmation, or may output a security signal capable of distinguishing between setting change and setting confirmation.

  (3) The gaming control device 100 is housed in the substrate box and attached to the back side of the front frame 12. The game control apparatus 100 is protected by a sealed substrate box except that the necessary operation units (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), various connectors and the like are exposed to the outside. As a result, the main medium (such as the gaming microcomputer 111) which is a trigger for transition of setting change or setting confirmation is protected by the sealed substrate box. In addition, the game control apparatus 100 causes the setting key switch 127 to be exposed to the outside, and the board box with the necessary operation units (the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value changing switch 126) other than the setting key switch 127 sealed. It may be protected.

  (4) The game control apparatus 100 does not have the setting key by making the operation of the setting key switch 127 mandatory to access the main medium (the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like) which is a trigger for transition of setting change or setting confirmation. Eliminate access to the third party's primary media. In addition, the game control apparatus 100 may be configured to enable access to a required operation unit (the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126) by the operation of the setting key switch 127. For example, the game control apparatus 100 may be configured to allow physical operation to the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126 by operating the setting key switch 127 (for example, opening and closing the operation window), or setting The operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126 may be electrically or logically validated by the operation of the key switch 127, or may be a combination of these.

  (5) The game control apparatus 100 has a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), a required information display unit (state display device 135, probability setting value display device 136) Is controlled by the gaming microcomputer 111. The game control apparatus 100 may be provided with an error release switch used for error release or a game start switch for giving a game start opportunity, and the error release switch and the game start switch may also be controlled by the gaming microcomputer 111. You may

  (6) The gaming control apparatus 100 determines four power-on states from the combination of the input states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the game control apparatus 100 sets the setting change state in which the set value can be changed, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON. The information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 when the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed, the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON, and the setting key switch 127 is OFF When the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the power is restored to the power failure recovery (power recovery) state.

  (7) In the setting change state, the gaming machine 10 can change the setting in the following steps. In the power-off state, the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state and the setting key is inserted (step 1). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) to turn on the setting key switch 127 (step 2). When the power is turned on (power switch is turned on) while the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed (turned on), the setting is changed (step 3). In the setting change state, the setting value is changed for each pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 (step 4). The setting value is determined by operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state, and the setting change state is ended (step 5).

  At this time, the notification of the setting change is given in steps 3 and 4 by notification means (for example, display by the display device 41, sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46) At 5, the RAM clear is notified. Also, the external information output unit (for example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs the security signal in steps 3 and 4, and stops the output of the security signal in step 5. In addition, prior to the RAM clear notification in step 5, the game control device 100 executes the RAM clear in step 3. That is, by giving priority to the setting change notification rather than the RAM clear notification, the game control apparatus 100 promptly performs the setting value change notification and aims to improve the effect as the anti-counterfeit measures. Further, the probability setting value display device 136 is turned off in steps 1 and 2, the setting value is displayed in steps 3 and 4, and turned off in step 5. Further, the state display device 135 turns off at steps 1 to 4 and displays the base value at step 5. The gaming machine 10 may be provided integrally with the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136. For example, the state display device 135 may double as the probability setting value display device 136. In that case, the state display unit 135 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in steps 3 and 4, and displays the base value in step 5. The game control state of the game control apparatus 100 is before the start of the game in steps 3 and 4, the game starts in step 5, and the game is started thereafter.

  (8) The gaming machine 10 can perform setting confirmation in the following steps in the setting confirmation state. In the power-off state, the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state and the setting key is inserted (step 1). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) to turn on the setting key switch 127 (step 2). By turning on the power (turning on the power switch) without pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (OFF), the setting confirmation state is established (step 3). The setting confirmation state is ended by operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state (step 4).

  At this time, the setting confirmation is notified in step 3 by notifying means (for example, display by the display device 41, sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46). Also, the external information output unit (for example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs the security signal in step 3 and stops the output of the security signal in step 4. Further, the probability setting value display device 136 is turned off in steps 1 and 2, displays the setting value in step 3, and is turned off in step 4. Further, the state display device 135 turns off in steps 1 to 3 and displays the base value in step 4. The gaming machine 10 may be provided integrally with the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136. For example, the state display device 135 may double as the probability setting value display device 136. In that case, the state display unit 135 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in step 3, and displays the base value in step 4. The game control state of the game control apparatus 100 is before the start of the game in step 3, starts the game in step 4, and is in the game thereafter.

  The gaming machine 10 can make setting changes and setting confirmations only before the start of the game when the power is turned on. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 eliminates setting change and setting confirmation during the game, and facilitates the operation guarantee during the game.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including the modification) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a main control device (game control device 100) that performs game control by enabling setting related to a game to be selected from a plurality of types, and slave control that performs effect control based on an instruction of the main control device. And a device (effect control device 300). The slave control device generates a game history based on the command, calculates game performance in a predetermined game state from the game history, and includes a control unit (CPU 311) that reports the game performance at a predetermined notification timing.

(2) The control unit of (1) generates a game history on the basis of a command accompanying game progression according to the set value.
(3) The control unit of (1) receives the operation of the player (or the manager or the like) and sets the notification content (disclosure content).

(4) The control unit of (1) notifies (discloses) the game performance during the game (special game).
(5) The control unit of (1) notifies (discloses) the game performance except during the game (special figure game) (for example, while waiting for a customer).

(6) The control unit of (1) makes it possible to set a period to be aggregated (aggregation period) in a period of collecting history (history collection period).
(7) The control unit of (1) sets a minimum amount of information for aggregated data, and supplements the shortage of the minimum amount of information with dummy data.

  (8) The control unit of (1) sets the minimum information amount for the aggregation data, and the shortage of the minimum information amount corresponds to past history information (for example, history information of the previous day, or aggregation data similar even before the previous day) Supplement with history information etc.).

Second Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. Conventionally, one control program is shared if the processing is the same, such as using the same table data even with different input parameters (commands) for the rendering control processing in the rendering control apparatus 300. However, when it is desired to correct only some input parameters (commands) in the development process, the development load tends to be large. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, control programs are prepared when input parameters (commands) are different even if the processing is the same, such as using the same table data. As a result, when it is desired to correct the processing of only a part of input parameters (commands) in the development process, the gaming machine 10 may correct the correction range only by the processing of the input parameters, thereby reducing the program development burden.

  First, a typical variation display sequence of the special view game (special view 1 game, special view 2 game) according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of the variable display sequence according to the second embodiment.

  In the variation display sequence shown, a time T00 from the variation start timing t0 to the variation stop timing t3 is set as a variation display time (including a temporary stop time, excluding a symbol stop time). In this fluctuation display sequence, time T01 from fluctuation start timing t0 to timing t1 is the first half fluctuation, time T02 from timing t1 to timing t2 is the second half fluctuation, and time T03 from timing t2 to fluctuation stop timing t3 is temporarily stopped. Do.

  The effect control device 300 receives a change start command from the game control device 100 and starts symbol variation (variation start), receives a stop command and stops symbol variation (variation stop). The variation start command may be a single command or a command set consisting of two or more commands (for example, stop symbol command, variation pattern command, hold command, etc.).

  The effect control device 300 receives the change start command, and determines the effect control content for each of the first half fluctuation, the second half fluctuation, and the temporary stop. The latter half change may include temporary stop. Therefore, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half change by one effect control program, and determines the effect control content of the second half change by another effect control program. In addition, when the first half variation, the second half variation, and the temporary stop are set as the basic sequence, the variation display sequence can include one or more sub effects as a subsequence in the basic sequence.

  For example, the effect control device 300 can selectively include the sub-effect at time T04 and the sub-effect at time T05 in the first half fluctuation from the fluctuation start timing t0 to the timing t1.

  In addition, although the production control apparatus 300 performs determination (lottery) of all production control contents by the first half fluctuation start, and performs production control during fluctuation according to the decided production control contents, the production during fluctuation The presentation control contents may be determined (lottery) at any time according to the progress of the control.

  Next, effect distribution in units of effect control programs for determining the effect control content in the variable display will be described using FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect control unit of variable display according to the second embodiment.

  The table of FIG. 69 (1) shows the combination of the former half fluctuation and the latter half fluctuation of the effect control program unit. The first half fluctuation “shortened loss”, “normal loss”, “step-up loss”, and “pseudo continuous loss” do not have the second half fluctuation to be paired. That is, the first half fluctuation “shortened loss”, “normal loss”, “step-up loss”, and “pseudo continuous loss” temporarily pass the second half fluctuation and temporarily stop.

  On the other hand, the first half fluctuations “normal reach”, “step up reach”, and “pseudo series reach” are paired with the second half fluctuations “step up distribution”. The latter half fluctuation “step-up distribution” has two or more distribution patterns but omits details.

  The presentation control device 300 is provided for each of the first half fluctuation “shortened loss”, “normal loss”, “normal reach”, “step up loss”, “step up reach”, “pseudo run loss”, and “pseudo run reach”. Prepare a corresponding effect control program. Further, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program corresponding to each distribution pattern of the second half fluctuation “step-up distribution”.

  The table in FIG. 69 (2) shows a list of sub effects. The sub effects include "PB (Push Button) Notice" and "PB Background Change". The effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program corresponding to each sub-effect.

  The effect control program may be provided with one effect control program corresponding to one input parameter (command), or one effect control corresponding to two or more input parameters (command) A program may be provided. Further, the effect control program is not limited to an independent program as long as the control unit is independent, and may be a subroutine or the like in one program.

  Next, the effect control program and reference table group in the first half fluctuation will be described using FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program of effect control units and reference table groups in the first half fluctuation of the second embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 executes the first half fluctuation program (rendering control program) “program MP1” while referring to the reference table group (table set) “table set MA”, thereby controlling the contents of the first half fluctuation “shortened loss” Decide.

  Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half fluctuation “normal loss” by executing the first half fluctuation program “program MP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”.

  Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half fluctuation “normal reach” by executing the first half fluctuation program “program MP3” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”.

  Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half fluctuation “step up loss” by executing the first half fluctuation program “program MP4” while referring to the reference table group “table set MC”.

  Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half fluctuation “step up reach” by executing the first half fluctuation program “program MP5” while referring to the reference table group “table set MC”.

  Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half fluctuation “pseudo continuous loss” by executing the first half fluctuation program “program MP6” while referring to the reference table group “table set MD”.

  Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half fluctuation “pseudo series reach” by executing the first half fluctuation program “program MP7” while referring to the reference table group “table set MD”.

  Thus, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program for each of the first half fluctuations. Further, the effect control device 300 prepares a table set for each of the first half variations. The table set may be prepared for each effect control program (for example, table set "table set MA"), or may be shared by two or more effect control programs (for example, table set " It may be a table set MB ").

  Next, the effect control program and the reference table group in the sub-effect will be described using FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program of effect control units and a reference table group in the sub-effect of the second embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 executes the sub effect program (effect control program) “program SP1” while referring to the reference table group (table set) “table set SA” to perform the effect control content of the sub effect “PB advance notice” Decide.

  Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the sub effect “PB background change” by executing the sub effect program “program SP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set SB”.

  Thus, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program for each sub-effect. Further, the effect control device 300 prepares a table set for each sub-effect. The table set may be prepared for each effect control program (for example, table set “table set SA”), or may be shared by two or more effect control programs.

  Although the combination of the control program of the effect control unit and the reference table group has been described for the first half fluctuation and the sub-effect, the same applies to the second half fluctuation. Also in the following, the first half variation and the sub-effect will be described, and the description of the same second half variation will be omitted.

  Next, an effect control program executed in the process of determining effect control content in the first half variation and a table set to be referred to will be described using FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program and a reference table group in the former half variation execution control of the second embodiment.

  From the fluctuation start timing t0 to the timing t1 by executing the first half fluctuation program “program MP2” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB” when the effect control device 300 receives the fluctuation start command regarding the normal loss. Determine the contents of the production control of the first half fluctuation “normal loss”.

  In addition, when the production control device 300 receives the fluctuation start command related to the normal reach, the first half of the fluctuation program “program MP3” is executed while referring to the reference table group “table set MB” to start timing from the fluctuation start timing t0. The contents of effect control of the first half fluctuation “normal reach” up to t1 are determined.

  The first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” are prepared separately, but the reference table group to be referred to is the same (reference table group “table set MB”), and the control content is the same program. is there.

  Also, the first half fluctuation program "program MP2" and "program MP3" can execute sub-rendering "PB preview" and "PB background change" during the first half fluctuation. For example, the effect control device 300 performs the execution determination of the sub-effect "PB preview" while the first half variation program "program MP2" or "program MP3" is being executed. The presentation control apparatus 300 executes the sub presentation program "program SP1" while referring to the reference table group "table set SA" when the sub presentation "PB preview" is to be executed. The contents of the effect control of “PB notice” are determined. Further, the effect control device 300 determines the execution of the sub effect “PB background change” while the first half variation program “program MP2” or “program MP3” is being executed. The presentation control apparatus 300 executes the sub presentation program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB" when the sub presentation "PB background change" is to be executed. Determine the contents of presentation control of "PB notice".

  Next, the table set "table set MB" which the effect control device 300 refers to during the execution of the first half fluctuation program "program MP2" and "program MP3" will be described using FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half fluctuation of the second embodiment.

  The table set “table set MB” includes a table “table MB1”, a table “table MB2”, a table “table MB3”, a table “table MB4”, and a table “table MB5”.

  Each table is a data table, and includes an effect pattern that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and its selection probability (lottery probability). For example, the table “table MB1” includes the effect patterns “pattern 11”, “pattern 12”, “pattern 13”, and “pattern 14”. Also, the table “table MB2” includes the effect patterns “pattern 21” and “pattern 22”. Further, the table “table MB3” includes the effect patterns “pattern 31” and “pattern 32”. Further, the table “table MB4” includes the effect patterns “pattern 41” and “pattern 42”. Further, the table “table MB5” includes the effect patterns “pattern 51” and “pattern 52”. The effect pattern included in each table may be only one or two or more.

  The solid lines connecting the respective tables in the drawing indicate the control sequences of the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”. For example, the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” first have a control sequence of referring to the table “table MB1” and selecting an effect pattern defined by the table “table MB1”. The first half variation program “program MP2” and “program MP3” refer to the table “table MB2” when the effect pattern “pattern 11” is selected in the table “table MB1”, and the effect pattern defined by the table “table MB2” Have a control sequence to select In the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the rendering pattern “pattern 12” is selected in the table “table MB1”, the table “table MB3” is defined with reference to the table “table MB3”. It has a control sequence for selecting an effect pattern. In the first half variation program “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the presentation pattern “pattern 13” or “pattern 14” is selected in the table “table MB1”, the presentation control content of the sub presentation “PB notice” is selected. It has a control sequence for executing the sub rendering program “program SP1” to be determined (execution of sub sequence).

  Then, when the rendering pattern "pattern 21" is selected in the table "table MB2", the first half variation program "program MP2" and "program MP3" finish the first half variation and connect to the second half variation "second half A" Have. In the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3”, when the rendering pattern “pattern 22” is selected in the table “table MB2”, the table “table MB4” is defined with reference to the table “table MB4”. It has a control sequence for selecting an effect pattern.

  Then, the control sequence in which the former half fluctuation program “program MP2” and “program MP3” end the former half fluctuation and connect to the latter half fluctuation “second half A” when the rendering pattern “pattern 31” is selected in the table “table MB3” Have. Further, a control sequence in which the former half fluctuation program “program MP2” and “program MP3” end the former half fluctuation and connect to the latter half fluctuation “second half B” when the rendering pattern “pattern 32” is selected in the table “table MB3” Have.

  Then, the first half fluctuation program “program MP2”, “program MP3” ends the first half fluctuation when the effect pattern “pattern 41” or “pattern 42” is selected in the table “table MB4”, and the second half fluctuation “second half A "Has a control sequence connected to

  Then, after executing the sub rendering program "program SP1", the first half variation program "program MP2" and "program MP3" refer to the table "table MB5" and control to select the rendering pattern defined by the table "table MB5" Have a sequence.

  Then, the first half variation program "program MP2", "program MP3" is a sub rendering program that determines the content of the rendering control of the sub rendering "PB background change" when the rendering pattern "pattern 51" is selected in the table "table MB5" It has a control sequence for executing “program SP2” (execution of subsequence). Further, a control sequence in which the former half fluctuation program “program MP2” and “program MP3” end the former half fluctuation and connect to the latter half fluctuation “second half C” when the rendering pattern “pattern 52” is selected in the table “table MB5” Have.

  Then, the first half fluctuation program "program MP2" and "program MP3" have a control sequence to end the first half fluctuation and connect to the second half fluctuation "second half C" after executing the sub rendering program "program SP2".

Thus, the effect control device 300 can determine the effect content of the first half fluctuation.
Next, the table set “table set SA” referred to during execution of the sub effect program “program SP1” and the table set “table set SB” referred to during execution of the sub effect program “program SP2” And will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the sub-effect of the second embodiment.

  FIG. 74 (1) shows a table set "table set SA" which the effect control device 300 refers to during execution of the sub effect program "program SP1". The table set “table set SA” includes a table “table SA1”. The table “table SA1” includes the effect patterns “pattern 61”, “pattern 62”, “pattern 63”, and “pattern 64”.

  The solid line connecting the tables in the drawing indicates the control sequence of the sub rendering program “program SP1”. For example, the sub rendering program “program SP1” has a control sequence of selecting a rendering pattern defined by the table “table SA1” with reference to the table “table SA1”.

  The sub-rendering program “program SP1” is the calling source even when any of the effect patterns “pattern 61”, “pattern 62”, “pattern 63”, and “pattern 64” is selected in the table “table SA1” It has a control sequence to return to the program (for example, the former half variation program “program MP2”) of the execution source.

  The effect pattern “pattern 61” (shown by cross hatching) is a specific effect requiring attention to the consistency of the effect, and is, for example, a true effect. The exact presentation can be selected only by the variation display that derives a hit, and should not be selected by a variation display that does not derive a hit.

  Since the sub rendering program “program SP1” and the table set “table set SA” (table “table SA1”) include such specific effects in the control target, the first half variation program “program” is a control portion requiring attention to consistency. It is separated from "MP2" and "program MP3". That is, since the effect control device 300 separates the control part requiring attention from the first half fluctuation program "program MP2", "program MP3" or the table set "table set MB", the first half fluctuation program "program MP2", "program MP3" And secure consistency as a whole while securing freedom against changes of the table set “table set MB”.

  FIG. 74 (2) shows a table set "table set SB" which the effect control device 300 refers to during execution of the sub effect program "program SP2". The table set “table set SB” includes the tables “table SB1” and “table SB2”. The table “table SB1” includes the effect patterns “pattern 71” and “pattern 72”. The table “table SB2” includes the effect patterns “pattern 81” and “pattern 82”.

  The solid line connecting the tables in the drawing indicates the control sequence of the sub rendering program “program SP2”. For example, the sub rendering program “program SP2” first has a control sequence of referring to the table “table SB1” and selecting a rendering pattern defined by the table “table SB1”.

  When the sub rendering program “program SP2” selects the rendering pattern “pattern 71” in the table “table SB1”, the sub rendering program “program SP2” refers to the table “table SB2” and selects the rendering pattern defined by the table “table SB2”. It has a control sequence. Further, when the sub rendering program “program SP2” selects the rendering pattern “pattern 72” in the table “table SB1”, it returns to the calling source (execution source) program (for example, the first half fluctuation program “program MP2”) It has a control sequence.

  Then, the sub rendering program “program SP2” is a program (for example, a calling source (execution source)) of the calling source (execution source) even when any of the rendering pattern “pattern 81” and “pattern 82” is selected in the table “table SB2”. It has a control sequence to return to the former half variation program "program MP2".

  The effect patterns “pattern 71” and “pattern 81” (indicated by cross hatching) are specific effects requiring attention to the consistency of the effects, and are, for example, incomprehensible effects. The exact presentation can be selected only by the variation display that derives a hit, and should not be selected by a variation display that does not derive a hit.

  The sub effect program “program SP2” and the table set “table set SB” (tables “table SB1”, “table SB2”) include such specific effects in the control target, and thus control locations requiring consistency attention It is separated from the first half fluctuation program "program MP2" and "program MP3". That is, since the effect control device 300 separates the control part requiring attention from the first half fluctuation program "program MP2", "program MP3" or the table set "table set MB", the first half fluctuation program "program MP2", "program MP3" And secure consistency as a whole while securing freedom against changes of the table set “table set MB”.

Next, table data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating an example of table data according to the second embodiment.
FIG. 75 (1) shows table data of the table "table MB1". The table “table MB1” includes effect patterns that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and the selection probability (lottery probability). For example, the table “table MB1” includes the effect patterns “pattern 11”, “pattern 12”, “pattern 13”, and “pattern 14” as selectable effect patterns. In the table "table MB1", when command A is an input parameter, that is, when the change start command is command A, the selection probability of the effect pattern "pattern 11" is "A11%" and the effect pattern "pattern 12" The selection probability of is “A12%”, the selection probability of the effect pattern “pattern 13” is “A13%”, and the selection probability of the effect pattern “pattern 14” is “A14%”. At this time, the sum of the selection probabilities of all the effect patterns is “100%”. The same applies when command B or command D is an input parameter.

  The table “table MB1” indicates that when the command C is an input parameter, none of the effect patterns “pattern 11”, “pattern 12”, “pattern 13”, and “pattern 14” are selected. In other words, the table “table MB1” indicates that the command C is not used as an input parameter.

  FIG. 75 (2) shows table data of the table "table SB1". The table “table SB1” includes effect patterns that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and the selection probability (lottery probability). For example, the table “table SB1” includes the effect patterns “pattern 71” and “pattern 72” as selectable effect patterns. In the table "table SB1", when the command A is an input parameter, that is, when the change start command is the command A, the selection probability of the effect pattern "pattern 71" is "A 71%" and the effect pattern "pattern 72" Indicates that the selection probability of is “A 72%”. At this time, the sum of the selection probabilities of all the effect patterns is “100%”. The same applies when command B or command D is an input parameter.

  The table "table SB1" indicates that neither the effect pattern "pattern 71" nor "pattern 72" is selected when the command C is an input parameter. In other words, the table “table SB1” indicates that the command C is not used as an input parameter.

  Further, the table "table SB1" has the pattern "pattern 71" as the specific effect. The table "table SB1" includes the pattern "pattern 71". Therefore, the table “table SB1” can close the range requiring attention to the consistency of the effect within the range of the table “table SB1” even if there is a change regarding the pattern “pattern 71”.

Although the tables “table MB1” and “table SB1” have been described as a representative, the same applies to other tables.
Next, the first half effect distribution process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of first half effect distribution processing of the second embodiment. The first half effect distribution process is a process of distributing the first half fluctuation program to be executed for each input parameter (command). The first half effect distribution process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The first half effect distribution process is a process executed by the control unit in step D56 of the received command analysis process.

[Step D151] The control unit acquires a command (variation start command) as an input parameter.
[Step D152] The control unit branches (previous stage distribution) to a step corresponding to the acquired command.

  [Step D153] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation "shortage loss", the control unit executes the shortening loss process. The shortening loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP1" while referring to the reference table group "table set MA". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after the execution of the shortening loss process.

  [Step D154] The control unit executes normal loss processing when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation “normal loss”. The normal loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after the execution of the normal losing process.

  [Step D155] The control unit executes normal reach processing when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half change “normal reach”. The normal reach process is a process of executing the first half variation program “program MP3” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after the execution of the normal reach process.

  [Step D156] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation “step up loss”, the control unit executes the step up loss process. The step-up failure process is a process of executing the first half variation program “program MP4” while referring to the reference table group “table set MC”. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after execution of the step-up losing process.

  [Step D157] The control unit executes the step up reach process when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half change “step up reach”. The step up reach process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP5" while referring to the reference table group "table set MC". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after the execution of the step up reach process.

  [Step D158] The control unit executes the pseudo continuous loss process when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation “pseudo continuous loss”. The pseudo continuous loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP6" while referring to the reference table group "table set MD". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after the execution of the pseudo-continuous loss process.

  [Step D159] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half change “pseudo chain reach”, the control unit executes the pseudo chain reach process. The pseudo series reach process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP7" while referring to the reference table group "table set MD". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after the execution of the pseudo series reach process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the typical loss processing is represented using the short loss processing, the normal loss processing, the normal reach processing, the step up loss processing, the step up reach processing, the pseudo continuous loss processing, and the pseudo continuous reach processing. explain. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the normal loss process of the second embodiment.

  The normal loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB". The normal loss process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The normal loss process is a process executed by the control unit in step D154 of the first half effect distribution process.

[Step D161] The control unit acquires a table set (reference table group “table set MB”).
[Step D162] The control unit sets the head sequence.

[Step D163] The control unit selects a table corresponding to the set sequence.
[Step D164] The control unit selects and sets an effect pattern by lottery with reference to the selected table.

  [Step D165] The control unit determines whether the current sequence is a tail sequence. If the current sequence is not the end sequence, the control unit proceeds to step D166. If the current sequence is the end sequence, the control unit ends the normal loss processing.

[Step D166] The control unit updates the sequence.
[Step D167] The control unit proceeds to Step D163 when the updated sequence designates the next table selection, and proceeds to Step D168 when the updated sequence designates execution of the sub-effect.

  [Step D168] The control unit distributes sub effects in accordance with the updated sequence. The control unit proceeds to step D169 if the sub-effect according to the updated sequence is a PB advance notice, and proceeds to step D170 if it is a PB background change.

  [Step D169] The control unit executes PB advance notice processing. The PB advance notice process is a process of executing the sub effect program "program SP1" while referring to the reference table group "table set SA". After executing the PB advance notice process, the control unit proceeds to step D165.

  [Step D170] The control unit executes PB background change processing. The PB background change process is a process of executing the sub rendering program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB". After executing the PB background change process, the control unit proceeds to step D165.

  Next, PB background change processing will be described using FIG. 78 as a representative of PB advance notice processing and PB background change processing. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of PB background change processing according to the second embodiment.

  The PB background change process is a process of executing the sub rendering program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB". The PB background change process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The PB background change process is a process executed by the control unit during execution of the effect control program (for example, step D170 of the normal loss process).

[Step D171] The control unit acquires a table set (reference table group “table set SA”).
[Step D172] The control unit sets the head sequence.

[Step D173] The control unit selects a table corresponding to the set sequence.
[Step D174] The control unit selects and sets an effect pattern by lottery with reference to the selected table.

  [Step D175] The control unit determines whether the current sequence is a tail sequence. If the current sequence is not the end sequence, the control unit proceeds to step D176. If the end sequence, the control unit ends the PB background change process.

[Step D176] The control unit updates the sequence and proceeds to Step D173.
The gaming machine 10 reduces the development burden of the program of the presentation control device 300 by such a presentation control program.

  For example, the first half fluctuation “normal loss” and the first half fluctuation “normal reach” are realized by the processing for executing the first half fluctuation program “program MP2” while the first half fluctuation “normal loss” is performed while performing similar rendering control The "normal reach" is realized by the process of executing the first half fluctuation program "program MP3". That is, the first half fluctuation “normal loss” and the first half fluctuation “normal reach” realize the same effect control by different programs.

  Here, the case in which the effect control content of the first half fluctuation “normal reach” is changed in the development process will be described using FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. 79 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half fluctuation corrected in the development process of the second embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the first half fluctuation corrected in the development process of the second embodiment.

  In the first half fluctuation “normal reach” in the development process, the table group to be referred to is replaced with the reference table group “table set MBa”. Thereby, the first half fluctuation which refers to the reference table group “table set MB” is only the first half fluctuation “normal loss”.

  In the development process, the first half fluctuation “normal reach” does not affect the first half fluctuation program “program MP3a” from the first half fluctuation program “program MP3” to the first half fluctuation “normal loss”.

  In the reference table group “table set MBa”, the table “table MB4” is replaced with the table “table MB9”. The first half variation program “program MP3a” has a total of four locations: three locations before and after table “table MB9” and one location away from table “table MB9” (after table “table MB3”) The branch is replaced with.

  The change in the control content of the first half fluctuation “normal reach” in the development process is also in the first half fluctuation “normal loss” when the program is shared between the first half fluctuation “normal loss” and the first half fluctuation “normal reach” It will spread. However, since the gaming machine 10 does not share the program between the first half fluctuation “normal loss” and the first half fluctuation “normal reach”, the influence range of the change of the control content can be divided.

Although the gaming machine 10 changes both the first-half fluctuation program and the reference table group, either one may be changed.
In addition, the first half fluctuation "normal reach" includes PB notice processing and PB background change processing in its control range, but PB notice processing and PB background change processing leave the processing contents to each sub-representation program It is independent from the first half change program. Therefore, the PB advance notice processing and the PB background change processing are not affected by the change in the first half change program or the reference table group.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modification) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a main control device (game control device 100) that performs game control, and a slave control device (effect control device 300) that performs effect control based on an instruction from the main control device. The slave control device stores the table data that defines the distribution of the effect, and the table data (reference table group “tables” based on the first command (for example, the fluctuation start command corresponding to the normal loss) of the commands. Of the first program (for example, the first half fluctuation program “program MP2” of the first half fluctuation “normal loss”) of the effect distribution from the set MB ”, the reference table group“ table set SA ”, and the reference table group“ table set SB ” The first control (normal loss process) controlled by execution and the effect distribution from the table data based on the second command (for example, the fluctuation start command corresponding to the normal reach) of the commands is different from the first program in the second By executing a program (for example, the first half fluctuation program “program MP3” of the first half fluctuation “normal reach”) Includes a second control (usually reach treatment) and possible execution control unit for controlling the (CPU 311), the.
(2) The table data of (1) includes first table data (reference table group "table set MB") not including the specific effect, and second table data including the specific effect (reference table group "table set SA", The control unit executes a first control for distributing effects from the first table data based on a first command by execution of a first program, including a reference table group “table set SB”; Executes the second control to distribute the effects from the first table data based on the second command by execution, and executes the third program different from the first program and the second program (for example, the sub-effect program of the sub fluctuation "PB advance notice" By the execution of “program SP1”, the effect from the second table data is transmitted based on the first command or the second command. Executing a third control dividing (PB notice processing).

Third Embodiment
First, the configuration of the gaming board of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described using FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. FIG. 81 is a front view (No. 1) showing an example of a gaming board of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a front view (part 2) showing an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

The game board 700 in FIG. 81 shows a state in which the movable part is stored, and the game board 700 in FIG. 82 shows a state in which the stored movable part is visible so as to be visible.
As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, in the game board 700, a center case 40 is provided substantially at the center. Inside the center case 40, the display device 41, the second display device 701, the lighting parts 702a to 702c, the logo display part 703, the first board rendering apparatus 704, and the second board rendering apparatuses 705L and 705R. The third board effect device 706 and the fourth board effect device 707 are provided.

  The second display device 701 notifies of information on a game (for example, an effect of the game, etc.) by display. In game board 700, second display device 701 has a hexagonal shape, and a display portion for displaying predetermined information such as characters is formed at a central portion, and a frame portion is formed to surround the display portion. . The frame portion is configured to be capable of lighting in a plurality of lighting colors (for example, configured by LEDs).

  The lighting units 702a to 702c notify information on the game (the progress of the game, etc.) according to the lighting state. In the game board 700, the lighting unit 702a displays "1", the lighting unit 702b displays "2", and the lighting unit 702c displays "3". The gaming machine 10, for example, turns on the lighting unit 702a and the lighting unit 702c by turning on the lighting unit 702a and turning off the lighting unit 702b and the lighting unit 702c, and thus lights the lighting unit 702a and the lighting unit 702b. In the state, the lighting unit 702c is turned off to notify that the progressing state is the second stage, and the lighting units 702a to 702c are turned on so that the progressing stage is in the third stage (for example, rendering is started) That it is just before

  Lighting portions 702a to 702c may be configured to be movable (for example, rotatable or swingable), for example. In this case, the gaming machine 10 can more easily grasp that the lighting state (lighting / lighting out) has changed by moving the lighting portions 702a to 702c when switching from light-off to lighting.

  The logo display portion 703 is composed of a plurality of characters (a plurality of component parts) for displaying a product name (a product name, a brand, etc.) of the gaming machine 10. Each component of the logo display unit 703 is configured to be able to be lit in a plurality of lighting colors (for example, configured by LEDs), and the logo display unit 703 is configured to display information (game progress etc.) Inform.

  In game board 700, logo display portion 703 is made up of seven constituent parts (letters) of "A", "B", "C", "D", "E", "F" and "G" Is configured to be controllable.

  For example, the logo display unit 703 turns off all the components at the start of the effect, increases the components of the lighted state each time the effect progresses, and turns all the components on in accordance with the end timing of the effect. Thus, the progress of the game (the progress of the effect) is notified. The logo display unit 703 turns off all the components at the start of the effect, increases the components in the lighted state each time the effect progresses, and turns all the components in the lighted state only in the case of a big hit. Then, the progress of the game (progress of the effect) may be notified.

  The first board effect device 704 performs a game effect by operating. In the game board 700, the first board effect device 704 is shaped like a bowl. The first board effect device 704 is provided on the left side of the display device 41, and as shown in FIG. 81, inclines the upper portion toward the display device 41 and is operable to a position where the upper portion overlaps the front side of the display device 41. It has become.

  The second board effect devices 705L and 705R perform game effects by operating. In the game board 700, the second board effect device 705L is arranged (for example, stored so as not to be visible) at a position not overlapping with the display device 41 on the upper left side of the display device 41 at normal time (non-operation time) In operation, as shown in FIG. 82, the display 41 is operable to extend from the upper left of the display 41 toward the center of the display 41 from the upper left of the display 41. In addition, the second board rendering device 705R is arranged (for example, stored so as not to be visible) at a position not overlapping with the display device 41 on the upper right side of the display device 41 at normal time (non-operation time). As shown in FIG. 1, the display 41 is operable to extend from the upper right of the display 41 toward the center of the display 41 from the upper right of the display 41.

  The third board effect device 706 effects the game by operating. In the game board 700, the third board effect device 706 is arranged (stored) on the back side of the second display device 701 at normal time (non-operation time), and at the time of operation, as shown in FIG. The front side of the display device 41 can be moved toward the center of the display device 41 from above the display device 41.

  In the game board 700, the second board effect devices 705L and 705R and the third board effect device 706 are coupled to each other in the central portion, and the three board effect devices integrally form a predetermined shape. It is configured to be possible.

  The fourth board effect device 707 produces a game effect by operating. The fourth board effect device 707 is a shape of a character related to the effect of the gaming machine 10. In the game board 700, the fourth board effect device 707 is arranged (for example, stored so as not to be visible) at a position not overlapping with the display device 41 on the lower left side of the display device 41 at normal times (when not moving) At the time of operation, as shown in FIG. 82, it appears on the front side of the lower part of the display device 41, and the front side of the lower part of the display device 41 can be operated left and right. Note that the fourth board effect device 707 may be capable of operating the weapon held by the character, and in addition to the movement in the left and right direction, the movement in the up and down direction and the movement for tilting the character are possible. May be

  The above is an example of the game board 700 of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment. Next, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 of the third embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment.

  The display screen 708 has two sets of decorative symbols (large symbol group 709, small symbol group 710), a special figure 1 pending number indication 711, a special figure 2 pending number indication 712, a pending indication 713, a pending decision indication 714 The display content includes the reserve digestion pedestal display 715 and the advance notice 716.

  The two sets of decorative designs include a large design group 709 as a first decorative design and a small design group 710 as a second decorative design. The large symbol group 709 takes charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 709 is displayed large at the approximate center of the display device 41. Large symbol group 709 includes left symbol 709L, middle symbol 709C and right symbol 709R. The left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

  In general, the large symbol group 709 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. Therefore, in the large symbol group 709, in many cases, the left symbol 709L and the right symbol 709R form a reach aspect, and it is possible to wait for the stop of the middle symbol 709C to form a hit aspect.

  The small symbol group 710 takes charge of notification of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 710 is displayed small on the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 709. Small symbol group 710 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 710 of the display screen 708 indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

  The special figure 1 pending number display 711 displays the number of pending storages (the number of starting memories) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 pending number display 712 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. The hold display 713 can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view fluctuation display game and notify of the reliability (expected degree) for the game result for each held memory according to the display mode. The pending storage indicates the right to execute the special view variable display game. For example, the hold display 713 is to change the display mode (character) of the hold storage display (the hold storage display displaying the hold storage) corresponding to each hold storage (for example, general character to special character when the reliability is high) To inform the credibility of the game result. In the hold display 713, instead of changing the display mode of the hold storage display, the game is performed by an operation mode (for example, a character is usually a walk mode and a character is a rush mode when the reliability is high). The reliability of the result may be reported.

  The holding and digest display 714 can indicate the changing state of the special view fluctuation display game and notify of the reliability of the game result by the display mode. In FIG. 83, the reserve consumption display 714 shows that the special-figure variation display game is in symbol variation. For example, the holding digest display 714 may be used to trust the game result by changing the display mode (character) of the holding storage display corresponding to the holding storage (for example, changing the general character to the special character when the reliability is high). Report the degree. It should be noted that the reserve digest display 714 is replaced by a change in the display mode of the reserve memory display, and the action mode (for example, the character is usually a walk mode and the character is a rush mode when the reliability is high) The reliability of the game result may be notified.

  The reserve digest pedestal display 715 clearly indicates where the reserve digest indicator 714 is displayed. The reserve digest pedestal display 715 includes a character display and a pedestal display. The character display displays a character that is a motif of an effect performed by the gaming machine 10. In FIG. 83, the character display displays a tiger-like character. The pedestal display displays a scaffold on which the storage display (character) corresponding to the storage in storage and the character displayed by the character display are located.

  The advance notice display 716 gives notice of notice of an effect (a given benefit) to be performed in the on-hold storage or on-hold storage. The advance notice display 716 displays a treasure box and a pot, and at the time of reserve storage in waiting or reserve storage in digestion, an effect corresponding to an item (symbol) to be displayed (in FIG. 83, an embodiment like a treasure box) To notify that an effect corresponding to an item corresponding to an item and an effect corresponding to an item such as an eyebrow is performed. The advance notice 716 is not displayed when the item is not stocked.

  The item displayed on the notice display 716 is added when the package is opened at the start of the digest of the holding storage (the holding storage display of the character having the package) displayed in the manner of having the package. The package appears at a predetermined timing. The package may be made to appear from the timing (at the time of the display start) at which the holding display is started to be displayed on the holding display 713 or may be made to appear halfway.

  Next, the relationship between the item appearing from the package and the effect to be performed (a bonus given) will be described using FIG. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between an item appearing from a package and its contents in the third embodiment.

  Items appearing out of the package are patterns P1 to P5. The item of the pattern P1 is an item (symbol) having a form like a skull. The item of the pattern P1 clearly indicates that the case (the effect of opening the package is a failure (the effect of turning)). When an item of pattern P1 appears from the package, the advance notice 716 does not stock (add) the item.

  The item of the pattern P2 is an item having an aspect like a heart. The item of the pattern P2 clearly indicates that a presentation PT acquisition presentation for acquiring a presentation PT (points) is performed in either a pending storage during digestion or a pending storage during waiting. For example, in the gaming machine 10, by accumulating the effect PT to a predetermined value, the right to execute the effect can be acquired. When an item of pattern P2 appears from the package, the notice display 716 stocks an item in the form of a heart.

  The item of the pattern P3 is an item having an aspect like a brow. The item of the pattern P3 clearly indicates that a presentation PT acquisition presentation is to be performed in either a pending storage during digestion or a pending storage during waiting. When the item of the pattern P3 appears from the package, the notice display 716 stores an item in a manner like a bag.

  The item of the pattern P4 is an item (item of a push button aspect) showing a push button (PB). The item of the pattern P4 is re-varied after temporary stop in a single variable display game (with operation of a push button) using a push button in either a pending storage during digestion or a pending storage during standby Perform, etc., clearly indicate that the effect is to be recalled as if the variable display game has been performed a plurality of times. When an item of pattern P4 appears from the package, the notice display 716 stores an item in a mode showing a push button. In addition, the pseudo continuous effect using the push button performed based on the item of the aspect which shows a push button may be special effects different from the effect using the push button performed irrespective of the said item.

  The item of the pattern P5 is an item having an aspect like a treasure box. The item of the pattern P5 clearly indicates that the opening effect of the treasure box (the effect that the item appears from the opening of the treasure box) is performed in either the pending storage during digestion or the pending storage during waiting. When the item of the pattern P5 appears from the package, the notice display 716 stores an item in the form of a treasure box.

Next, items appearing from the treasure box will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the relation between the items appearing from the treasure box and the contents thereof in the third embodiment.
Items appearing from inside the treasure box in the opening effect of the treasure box are patterns P10 to P14. The item of the pattern P10 is an item having a form like a skull. The item of the pattern P10 clearly indicates that it is a gusset (does not develop from the treasure box opening effect). When the item of pattern P10 appears from the treasure box during the process of reserve memory storage (during special figure variation display game execution), the effect related to the appeared item is not performed after the opening effect of the relevant treasure box is finished. .

  The item of the pattern P11 is an item having an aspect like a heart. The item of the pattern P11 clearly indicates that the development of the production PT is performed. When the item of pattern P11 appears from the treasure box during the process of reserve storage (during special figure variation display game execution), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the effect PT is obtained in the special figure variation display game Takes place.

  The item of the pattern P12 is an item having an aspect like a brow. The item of the pattern P12 clearly indicates that the presentation PT is developed. When the item of pattern P12 appears from the treasure box during the process of reserve storage (during special figure variation display game execution), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the effect PT is obtained in the special figure variation display game Takes place.

  The item of the pattern P13 is an item of the aspect which displays the character of continuation. The item of the pattern P13 clearly indicates the development of a pseudo-sequence effect. When the item of pattern P13 appears from the treasure box during the process of reserve storage (during special figure variation display game execution), after completing the opening effect of the treasure box, the pseudo-series effect is performed in the special figure variation display game It is carried out.

  The item of the pattern P14 is an item of the aspect which displays the character of intense heat. The item of the pattern P14 clearly indicates that it is highly reliable (for example, 60%). When an item of pattern P14 appears from the treasure box during the process of reserve storage (during special figure variation display game execution), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the reliability figure is high in the special figure variation display game A presentation is performed.

  Next, an example of effects of the variable display game executed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 86 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a third diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a fourth diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment.

A display screen 717 shown in FIG. 86 (1) is a display screen during symbol variation suspension (during variation display game suspension), and shows a state where there is no item stocked in the advance notice display 716.
In the display screen 717, since there is no item stocked in the notice display 716, the notice display 716 is in a non-display state. Further, on the display screen 717, since the symbol variation is stopped, the holding storage display is not displayed on the holding and digest display 714. In addition, the display screen 717 shows that the pending storage display of the aspect having the package is located at the first (head) in the pending display 713, and that the item appears from the package when starting the next storage of the pending storage. Clearly stated.

  A display screen 718 shown in FIG. 86 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 717, and is in a state (state in which symbol variation has been started) which has started to digest the holding memory displayed in a manner with a package. Show. On the display screen 718, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are moving at high speed. In the display screen 718, each hold storage display slides one from the state in the display screen 717, and the hold storage display of the aspect having the package located at the first position of the hold display 713 is located in the hold digest display 714, It is indicated that the special view variable display game corresponding to the pending storage displayed in the form having the package is started.

  A display screen 719 shown in FIG. 86 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 718, and shows a state where an opening effect for opening a package is being executed. The display screen 719 is a state in which an item of pattern P4 (a push button mode) appears from the package of the reserve storage display displayed in the reserve digest display 714, and the reserve storage during digestion or the reserve storage during waiting It is clearly shown that a pseudo-series effect using a push button is performed in any of the special figure variation display games. Further, on the display screen 719, a message of “tribute thanks!” Is displayed from the characters making up the holding and digesting pedestal display 715 to clearly indicate that the item is an advantageous item for the player.

  The display screen 720 shown in FIG. 87 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 719, and is in a state where an item appearing from the package is newly stocked in the notice display 716. On the display screen 720, since the item to be stocked has appeared, the advance notice display 716 is in the display state, and the displayed advance notice display 716 displays the item of the push button appearance appeared from the package. Then, on the display screen 720, in response to the appearance of the item from the package, the mode of the holding storage display for displaying the storage pending during digestion is changed from the mode with the package to the mode without the package. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing the push button (does not receive the input) in the state of being displayed in the advance notice display 716.

  A display screen 721 shown in FIG. 87 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 720, and is independent of the pseudo-series effect using the push button notified in advance in the notice display 716 in the special view variable display game (independent Show a state in which an effect using a push button is being generated.

  The display screen 721 includes the effect display 722 in the display content. The effect display 722 displays an effect to be executed in the special view variable display game. In the display screen 721, the effect display 722 shows an image showing the pressing of the push button (image prompting the operation of the push button), a message “Press !!” (message prompting the operation of the push button), and the remaining A timer indicating time is displayed, and it is clearly shown that an effect using a push button (effect of pressing a push button) in a special view variable display game is being executed. In the display screen 721, the stock state (stocked item) of the notice display 716 does not change from the stock state (stocked item) of the notice display 716 on the display screen 720. Thereby, the display screen 721 does not have an effect that the effect display 722 is the advance notice in the advance notice display 716, that is, the effect using the push button being executed is irrelevant to the item of the push button stocked in the advance notice display 716. It shows that it is.

  Then, in the gaming machine 10, while the display screen 721 is displayed (when an effect using the push button is displayed in the effect display 722 while the item of the push button is displayed in the advance display 716), the player presses the push button (operation ), Only the operation (input by pressing) on the effect display 722 is effective (the effect using the push button displayed by the effect display 722 is prioritized). That is, the gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing the item of the push button aspect stored in the advance notice display 716.

  As described above, since the gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing in the state displayed in the advance notice display 716 and therefore does not invite the mix of the operations, the item of the push button is displayed on the advance notice display 716 There is no need to set restrictions such as prohibiting the implementation of effects using push buttons performed independently. That is, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the freedom of presentation (preventing the reduction of the freedom) during the advance notice, and can improve the interest.

  In this case, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the item of the push button mode displayed on the advance notice 716 (for example, gray scale) and clearly indicates that the input by pressing is invalidated. Good.

A display screen 723 shown in FIG. 87 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 721, and shows a state in which the special figure variation display game is ended and symbol variation is stopped.
On the display screen 723, in the special view variation display game being executed on the display screen 721, the effect that the item stocked in the advance notice display 716 is not notified is not performed (the stocked item is not consumed). Since the variable display game is over, the stock state of the advance notice 716 is the same as the stock state on the display screen 721.

  The display screen 724 shown in FIG. 88 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 723 and shows a state in which the new pending storage is started to be digested (state in which fluctuation has started). In the display screen 724, each hold storage display slides from the state in the display screen 723 and the hold storage display located at the first position of the hold display 713 in the display screen 723 is located in the hold digest display 714, A special view variable display game corresponding to the memory display has been started.

  A display screen 725 shown in FIG. 88 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 724, and a state in which an effect corresponding to an item (item in the form of a push button) stocked in the advance notice display 716 is started. Indicates

  In the display screen 725, the item of the push button stocked in the notice display 716 moves from the inside of the notice display 716 toward the center of the screen while being enlarged. Thereby, the display screen 725 clearly indicates that the effect to be started from now is the effect that the item of the aspect of the push button is giving notice (a pseudo-series effect using the push button).

  A display screen 726 shown in FIG. 88 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 725, and a state in which an effect corresponding to an item (item in the form of a push button) stocked in the advance notice display 716 is being executed. Indicates

  On the display screen 726, as the effect display 722, an image showing a state of pressing the push button, a message "Press!", And a timer showing the remaining time are displayed, and a effect using the push button in the special view variation display game It clearly indicates that (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed. On the display screen 726, the item stocked in the notice display 716 executes the effect that the notice has been notified (consumes the item stocked), and the notice indicated that the item stocked in the notice display 716 runs out The display 716 is in the non-display state.

  Next, in the case of pseudo continuous effect using the push button executed based on the item of the push button stocked in the advance notice display 716 and when the input is performed by pressing the push button and when the input is not performed by the press An example of the contents of the effect performed on the game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a view showing an example of effect contents to be performed when the push button is pressed and when the push button is not pressed in the pseudo continuous effect using the push button in the third embodiment.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the gaming machine 10 does not perform input by pressing the push button in the pseudo continuous effect using the push button (in the case of non-pressing). (Normal pseudo link) is executed, and when an input is made by pressing a push button in an effect using a push button, a pseudo link (exclusive pseudo link) prepared exclusively for a pseudo link effect using a push button is executed. That is, the gaming machine 10 uses the push button to select the type of pseudo link in the pseudo link effect using the push button.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the gaming machine 10 does not perform input by pressing the push button in the pseudo-series effect using the push button (if it is not pressed), high-speed fluctuation (display screen If the input is made by pressing the push button in the effect using the push button, the pseudo sequence is executed. That is, the gaming machine 10 uses the push button to select whether to execute the pseudo continuous effect or not in the pseudo continuous effect using the push button.

Next, setting processing of a package to be made to appear in the pending storage display will be described using FIG. FIG. 90 is a view showing a flowchart of a package setting process in the third embodiment.
The package setting process is a process performed when a hold storage is newly generated by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300, that is, when a winning command indicating that the hold storage is newly generated is received. The package setting process is, for example, a process executed by the control unit in step D23 of the main process.

  [Step D300] The control unit performs an effect such that an effect to be performed in the pending storage newly generated based on the winning command becomes an object of an advance notice (an effect to be performed as an advance notice notified as an advance notice in the special view change display game) It is determined whether the The control unit proceeds to step D301 if it is determined to execute the effect to be the object of the advance notice, and proceeds to step D307 if it is determined not to execute the effect to be the advance object.

  [Step D301] The control unit determines whether or not there is a holding storage displayed in a manner of holding the package in the holding storage. If the control unit determines that there is a pending storage displayed in the form of holding the package, the process proceeds to step D302, and if it is determined that there is no pending storage displayed in the form of the character holding the package, step D304. Go to

  [Step D302] The control unit determines whether or not the content of the package of the pending storage displayed in a manner with the package can be replaced. For example, the control unit determines that replacement is possible when the pattern P1 is set as the content of the package, and determines that replacement is not possible when other than the pattern P1 is set as the content. Priorities are set for each pattern, and the priority of the pattern before replacement is compared with the priority of the pattern after replacement, and it is determined that the replacement is possible if the priority of the pattern after replacement is high. May be

If the control unit determines that the contents of the package can be replaced, the process proceeds to step D303. If the control unit determines that the contents of the package can not be replaced, the process proceeds to step D304.
[Step D303] The control unit substitutes the contents of the package from the pattern P1 for the pattern of the item corresponding to the effect to be the object of the notice to be executed by the newly generated pending storage.

  [Step D304] The control unit sets the package as a display mode of the pending storage display corresponding to any pending storage (newly generated pending storage or pending storage in standby) (the package is displayed as a display mode of the pending storage display) Set the character you have).

  [Step D305] The control unit sets, as the contents of the package set in Step D304, a pattern of an item corresponding to an effect to be a target of a notice to be executed by the newly generated pending storage.

  [Step D306] The control unit determines whether a package has been set as the display mode of the hold storage display corresponding to the newly generated hold storage. If the control unit determines that the package is not set as the display mode of the hold storage display corresponding to the newly generated hold storage, the process proceeds to step D307, and the display of the hold storage display corresponding to the newly generated hold storage As a mode, when it is determined that the package has been set, the package setting process is ended.

  [Step D307] The control unit determines whether or not it is the generation timing of a luggage with a skull. For example, when the random number is generated and the random number indicates a predetermined value, the control unit determines that it is the occurrence timing of the luggage with the skull.

  The control unit proceeds to step D308 when it is determined that it is the occurrence timing of the luggage with the skull, and ends the luggage setting processing when it is determined that the occurrence timing of the luggage with the skull is not.

  [Step D308] The control unit sets the package as the display mode of the hold storage display corresponding to the newly generated hold storage (sets the character having the package as the display mode of the hold storage display).

  [Step D309] The control unit sets the pattern P1 or the pattern P5 (treasure box with a skull) as the contents of the package set in Step D304, and ends the package setting process.

  The above is the third embodiment. As described above, the gaming machine 10 predicts the progress of the effect by giving advance notice in advance that the effect such as using the push button in the advance notice display 716 is performed in either the withholding storage during digestion or with the holding storage during waiting. To maintain and improve the sense of expectation.

  The gaming machine 10 can make the holding storage for causing an item to appear and the holding storage for executing an effect for which the item is previewed to be different holding memories so that the player can not grasp the timing at which the effect for which the item is notified is generated. According to this, the gaming machine 10 gives an expectation that the itemized notice may be generated depending on the item even when the reserved memory is digested prior to the reserved memory for performing the indicated item. Can. That is, the gaming machine 10 can maintain and improve the sense of expectation even for effects not targeted for advance notice.

  Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the oversight (forgetting to operate) of the effect and improve the interest by notifying in advance that the effect or the like using the push button is started by the advance notice display 716.

  Although the gaming machine 10 has been described as not accepting input by pressing the item of the push button in the advance notice display 716, the present invention is not limited thereto. The gaming machine 10 may invalidate the input by pressing during the execution of the effect using the push button performed independently of the pseudo-series effect using the push button, and when the input by pressing is performed at other timings. The input may be accepted before the start of the pseudo-series effect as a reservation input. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the user from missing an effect by forgetting to press it.

Modification 1 of Third Embodiment
Next, the effects performed in the first modification of the third embodiment will be described using FIGS. 91 to 92. FIG. FIG. 91 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 92 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the first modification of the third embodiment.

  A display screen 727 shown in FIG. 91 (1) shows a display screen during symbol variation (during a variation display game). On the display screen 727, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are moving at high speed.

  A display screen 728 shown in FIG. 91 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 727, and shows a state immediately before the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. In the display screen 728, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L fluctuates at low speed. That is, the display screen 728 clearly indicates that the left symbol 709L is about to be temporarily stopped.

  A display screen 729 shown in FIG. 91 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 728, and shows a state in which the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. In the display screen 729, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L temporarily stops at "5", and the symbols are rocked.

A display screen 730 shown in FIG. 92 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 729, and shows a state in which an effect is generated on the left symbol 709L.
In the display screen 730, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. Further, on the display screen 730, an effect indicating an image of the push button and generation of an effect is displayed as an effect display 722 in a portion overlapping with the number (identifier) of the temporarily stopped left symbol 709L.

A display screen 731 shown in FIG. 92 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 730, and shows a state where an effect using a push button is started.
On the display screen 731, an image showing the pressing of the push button, a message “Press!”, And a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed as the effect display 722, and a effect using the push button in the special view variation display game It clearly indicates that (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed.

  The above is the effects performed in the first modification of the third embodiment. Generally, when the symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable display game, the player puts the drawing which has been temporarily stopped into view (by visual observation). Therefore, immediately after the temporary stop, the game machine 10 displays the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers constituting the temporarily stopped symbol and uses the push button after notifying that the effect using the push button is performed. By starting the effect, the player can be more reliably recognized that the effect using the push button is started. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from overlooking the effect using the push button, and can improve interest.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
In the first modification of the third embodiment, the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the numbers of symbols temporarily stopped after temporary stop (change the symbol to display the push button), and effects using the push button are made. It started. In the second modification of the third embodiment, the symbol in motion is replaced with a symbol for displaying a push button (for example, a symbol in which a push button is superimposed on the front side of numerals) and a symbol for displaying a push button After temporarily stopping, an effect using a push button is started.

  Here, the effects performed in the second modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 2 of the third embodiment.

  A display screen 732 shown in FIG. 93 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 728, and shows a state immediately before the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. In the display screen 732, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L fluctuates at low speed. In addition, on the display screen 732, a temporary stop of the left symbol 709L (the left symbol 709L in which the number is replaced with the symbol for displaying the push button) is displayed (slow speed). Fluctuating). That is, the display screen 732 clearly indicates that the left symbol 709L is about to temporarily stop in a state where the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbols.

  A display screen 733 shown in FIG. 93 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 732 and shows a state in which the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. In the display screen 733, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped in a state where the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbols and swings.

A display screen 734 shown in FIG. 93 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 733, and shows a state in which an effect using a push button is started.
On the display screen 734, as the effect display 722, an image showing a state of pressing the push button, a message of "Press!", And a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed, and a effect using the push button in the special view variation display game It clearly indicates that (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed.

  The above is the effects performed in the second modification of the third embodiment. Generally, in the variable display game, the player puts (temporarily looks) a drawing that is temporarily stopped. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers constituting the temporarily stopped symbol immediately before the temporary stop (low speed fluctuation state), and the push button on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbol By temporarily stopping the display of the image and notifying that the effect using the push button is performed, the effect using the push button is started, thereby more reliably recognizing to the player the start of the effect using the push button It can be done. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from overlooking the effect using the push button, and can improve interest.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
Next, the effects performed in the third modification of the third embodiment will be described using FIG. 94 to FIG. FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in the third modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 95 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 96 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third modification of the third embodiment; FIG. 97 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third modification of the third embodiment.

  First, the flow of the effect will be described using the timing chart of FIG. The timing chart shown in FIG. 94 is an example of the simulated chain effect performed by the gaming machine 10, and shows the flow of effects when three pseudo chains are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 94, the gaming machine 10 starts an N-th variable display game using music A as BGM (Back Ground Music) at timing t10. Then, when the N-th variable display game is started, the gaming machine 10 executes the variable display effect (pseudo-first run). An example of the display screen during the variable display effect (pseudo-series first time) will be described using the display screen 735 of FIG. 95 (1) and the display screen 736 of FIG. 95 (2).

  The display screen 735 shown in FIG. 95 (1) shows the display screen during the variable display effect (pseudo reiteration first time). In the display screen 735, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are fluctuated at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 causes BGM to flow at a predetermined volume together with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 735.

  A display screen 736 shown in FIG. 95 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 735, and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (pseudo-series first time). In the display screen 736, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped with a symbol of “7”, and the right symbol 709R is about to temporarily stop with a symbol of “7” (low speed fluctuation), and the middle symbol 709C is high speed fluctuation doing. That is, the display screen 736 tries to derive the reach state. Then, the gaming machine 10 causes the BGM to flow at a predetermined volume in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 736, operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R, gives a sense of expectation of the reach occurrence, and improves interest. I am

  The gaming machine 10 starts an effect (pseudo continuous continuation effect) of informing the player whether or not to continue the pseudo run when the second symbol temporary stop state is reached in the variable display effect (pseudo run first time) at the timing t11 . At this time, the gaming machine 10 lowers the volume while playing the music A to mute the sound (silence), and reproduces SE (Sound Effect) used for the pseudo-continuous continuation effect.

  In the pseudo-continuous continuation effect, the gaming machine 10 notifies the player that the pseudo-series is continued when continuing the pseudo-series, and shifts to a state (variation display state) in which the three symbols are changed at high speed. . On the other hand, when the game machine 10 does not continue the pseudo run, it notifies that the pseudo run is not continued, and shifts to a result derivation display etc. for deriving the result of the variable display game.

An example of the screen display during the two symbol temporary stop (pseudo continuous continuation effect) will be described using the display screen 737 in FIG. 95 (3).
A display screen 737 shown in FIG. 95 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 736, and shows the display screen during the two symbol temporary stop (pseudo continuous continuation effect). In the display screen 737, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped with a symbol of "7", the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped with a symbol of "6", and the middle symbol 709C is fluctuating at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 mutes the BGM in combination with the pseudo continuous continuation effect being executed on the display screen 737, changes the background music to the BGM, and lets the SE know that the effect is being generated, and the sense of expectation is felt. To improve interest.

  The gaming machine 10 executes the variable display effect (the second time) when notifying that the pseudo link is continued at the timing t12. The gaming machine 10 stops the reproduction of the SE, and starts to flow the volume of the music A (BGM) that has been muted at the predetermined volume (return to). An example of the display screen during the variable display effect (the second pseudo run) will be described using the display screen 738 of FIG. 96 (1), the display screen 739 of FIG. 96 (2), and the display screen 740 of FIG. 96 (3).

  A display screen 738 shown in FIG. 96 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 737, and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (pseudo ream second time). In the display screen 738, a character such as a tiger and a message of "The game is now!" Is displayed as the effect display 722, and the effect of the special figure change display game is continued (re-change starts). Clearly stated. In addition, the gaming machine 10 operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 738 to change the effect, thereby improving the interest. Then, the gaming machine 10 stops the SE being reproduced on the display screen 737, and flows the BGM being in the mute state at a predetermined volume.

  The display screen 739 shown in FIG. 96 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 738, and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (pseudo reiteration second time). On the display screen 739, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are moving at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 causes BGM to flow at a predetermined volume together with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 739.

  A display screen 740 shown in FIG. 96 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 739, and shows a display screen during the variable display effect (pseudo ream second time). In the display screen 740, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped with a symbol of “7”, and the right symbol 709R is about to temporarily stop with a symbol of “7” (low speed fluctuation), and the middle symbol 709C is high speed fluctuation doing. That is, the display screen 740 tries to derive the reach state. Then, the gaming machine 10 causes the BGM to flow at a predetermined volume in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 740, operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R, and gives a sense of expectation of reach occurrence, which improves interest. I am

  The gaming machine 10 starts the pseudo-continuous continuation presentation, when the second symbol temporary stop state is reached at the timing t13 in the variable display effect (the second pseudo-link). At this time, the gaming machine 10 lowers the volume while reproducing the music A (BGM) to mute the sound (silence), and reproduces the SE used for the pseudo-continuous continuation effect. An example of screen display during the two symbol temporary stop (pseudo continuous continuation effect) will be described using the display screen 741 of FIG. 97 (1).

The display screen 741 shown in FIG. 97 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 740, and shows the display screen during the two symbol temporary stop (pseudo continuous continuation effect).
In the display screen 741, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped with a symbol of "7", the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped with a symbol of "6", and the middle symbol 709C fluctuates at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 mutes the BGM in combination with the pseudo continuous continuation effect being executed on the display screen 741, changes the background music to the BGM, and lets the SE know that the effect is being generated, and the sense of expectation is felt. To improve interest.

  The gaming machine 10 executes the variable display effect (third time) when notifying of continuing the pseudo link at the timing t14. The gaming machine 10 stops the reproduction of the SE, and starts to flow the volume of the music A (BGM) that has been muted at a predetermined volume (return to the original state). An example of the display screen during the variable display effect (the third pseudo run) will be described using the display screen 742 in FIG. 97 (2) and the display screen 743 in FIG. 97 (3).

  The display screen 742 shown in FIG. 97 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 741, and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (pseudo-simulation series third time). In the display screen 742, a character such as a tiger and a message “I will decide on the next!” Are displayed as the effect display 722, and the effect of the special view variable display game continues (re-change starts) Clearly. In addition, the gaming machine 10 operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 742 to change the effect, thereby improving the interest. Then, the gaming machine 10 stops the SE being reproduced on the display screen 741, and causes the BGM being silenced to flow at a predetermined volume.

  The display screen 743 shown in FIG. 97 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 742 and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (pseudo ream second time). In the display screen 743, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 causes BGM to flow at a predetermined volume together with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 743.

  The gaming machine 10 executes the variable display effect (third time) up to the timing t15, derives the result of the variable display game (result derivation display), and performs the result display for a predetermined time, and the Nth special figure fluctuation display game is performed. finish.

  The above is the flow of the effect in the modification 3 of the third embodiment. As described above, in the case where the SE and BGM are not mixed when the SE is reproduced, the gaming machine 10 does not stop the BGM but switches the BGM to the mute state. As a result, when the gaming machine 10 raises the volume of the BGM after ending the reproduction of the SE, the BGM can be heard from the reproduction position at which the reproduction time of the SE has elapsed. As described above, by making it possible to listen to the BGM from the reproduction position where it is desired to elapse for the reproduction time of the SE, the gaming machine 10 prevents the BGM from coming to an end and prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable and improves interest. it can.

[Modification 4 of the third embodiment]
Next, a modification 4 of the third embodiment will be described. First, the decorative symbol used in the fourth modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a view showing an example of a decorative symbol in the modification 4 of the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 uses a decorative symbol A and a decorative symbol B as a decorative symbol used for each symbol of the large symbol group 709. The decorative symbol A is a decorative symbol that is mainly used, and the decorative symbol B is a decorative symbol that is used as a slave (a decorative symbol that is used only in a specific case). More specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the decorative symbol B is used only when a big hit is derived in the special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) generated by winning in the special figure 2 starting opening. It is a symbol to be

  The decorative pattern A includes the patterns 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750. The symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 are distinguishable from other symbols by display modes different from one another.

  The symbol 744 is a symbol for displaying the numeral "1" composed of the numeral element (identifier) having the distinctiveness as the symbol by the numeral "1". The symbol 745 is a symbol for displaying the numeral "2" which is composed of the numeral element having the distinctiveness as the symbol by the numeral "2". The symbol 746 is a symbol for displaying the numeral "3" which is composed of the numeral element having the distinctiveness as the symbol by the numeral "3". The symbol 747 is a symbol for displaying the numeral "4" which is composed of numeral elements having the distinctiveness as a symbol by the numeral "4". The symbol 748 is a symbol for displaying the numeral "5" composed of the numeral element having the distinctiveness as the symbol by the numeral "5". The symbol 749 is a symbol for displaying the numeral "6" which is composed of numeral elements having the distinctiveness as a symbol by the numeral "6". The symbol 750 is a symbol for displaying the numeral "7" which is composed of numeral elements having the distinctiveness as a symbol by the numeral "7".

  The decorative symbol B is a symbol having the same discriminating power as the numeral component in the decorative symbol A, and for example, a character element (value conversion identifier) indicating that the numeral component in the decorative symbol A is more valuable than the decorative symbol A It is an added form (a form in which a character element is added to the pattern 750). That is, in the gaming machine 10, the jackpot derived with the decorative symbol B (design 751) indicates that the value is relatively higher than the jackpot derived with the decorative symbol A (design 750).

  The decorative symbol B includes a symbol 751. The symbol 751 is a character element indicating that the value “7” is higher in value than the symbol 750 consisting only of the numeral element (identifier) having the distinctiveness as a symbol and the numeral “7” by the character “pole”. It is a design composed of

  Next, the gaming state in which the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B are used will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a symbol used in the gaming state in the fourth modification of the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the gaming machine 10 is different in the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) generated by winning to the special figure 1 starting opening and the symbols used in the special figure 2 variation display game ing.

  In the gaming machine 10, the symbol used during the variation and the temporary stop of the special view 1 variation display game is configured by the decorative symbol A. In other words, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the gaming machine 10 changes the symbols at high speed by sequentially displaying the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. And temporarily stop one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and the temporary stop state is displayed.

  In the gaming machine 10, the symbol used during the stop of the special view 1 variation display game is configured by the decorative symbol A. That is, the gaming machine 10 causes the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C to stop one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in the special figure 1 variable display game, and the derivation result Display

  In the gaming machine 10, a symbol used in the special figure 2 variation display game during the variation and the temporary stop is configured by the decorative symbol A. In other words, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the gaming machine 10 changes the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in order on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. And temporarily stop one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and the temporary stop state is displayed.

  In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used during stoppage of the special view 2 variation display game are configured by the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B. That is, the gaming machine 10 stops any one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, 751 for the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in the special figure 2 variable display game. Display the result of derivation.

  More specifically, when the gaming machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbols 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game, the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748 are for the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. , 749, 750 are displayed in order, and high-speed fluctuation is performed, and one of the patterns 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 is temporarily stopped on the left pattern 709L, the right pattern 709R, and the middle pattern 709C. After that, the symbol 751 is stopped by the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R and the middle symbol 709C.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, in the case other than that (when the jackpot consisting of the symbols 751 is not derived), the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 for the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. After making one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 temporarily stop on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, the left symbol is displayed. One of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 is stopped on the 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and the derived result is displayed.

  Hereinafter, in the gaming machine 10, in the special view 2 variable display game, a big hit made of the symbol 751 is derived instead of a big hit made of the symbol 750. That is, in the gaming machine 10, it is assumed that a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 does not occur in the special figure 2 variable display game.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A (a symbol without a character element) during change and stop, and the special figure 2 change display game only decorates when stopping when the jackpot is derived using the symbol 751. By using the symbol B (the symbol with the character element), it is possible to easily grasp that the big hit consisting of the symbol 751 is a special big hit (high value big hit), to improve the understanding of the game and to improve the interest Can.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, the decorative symbol A used during fluctuation and stoppage is also used in the special view 2 fluctuation display game, so the image etc. used during the fluctuation and stoppage is the special view 1 fluctuation display game It is possible to share it with the video etc., and to suppress the increase of the capacity etc. and the increase of the time for preparing the video.

  Next, the case of deriving a big hit consisting of symbols 750 in the special figure 1 variation display game and the case of deriving a big hit consisting of symbols 751 in the special figure 2 variation display game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a comparison between the case of deriving "777" in the special view 1 variation display game and the case of deriving "777" in the special view 2 variation display game in the fourth modification of the third embodiment. .

  First, the case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 in the special view 1 variation display game will be described. The gaming machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 when the batch display device derives “●●●●●●●●” in the special view 1 variable display game. When the gaming machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbol 750, it gives "4R" as a bonus to the player. The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C from the symbol 750 Derive a big hit.

  Next, the case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variation display game will be described. The gaming machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 when the batch display device derives “●●●●●●●●” in the special view 2 variable display game. When the gaming machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbol 751, it gives the player “16R” as a bonus (adding a higher value than the big hit of “777” consisting of the symbol 750). The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then turns the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C to the symbol 751. By replacing, the big hit consisting of the pattern 751 is derived.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, when giving different values (round) with symbols displaying the same identifier, the temporary stop mode (result deriving process) uses only the pattern of the same mode, but only at the time of result derivation By using different patterns (pattern 750, pattern 751) to display the same identifier, it is possible to easily grasp that the value of the jackpot consisting of the respective patterns is different, thereby enhancing the understanding of the game and improving the interest it can.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, the value of the big hit made of the symbol whose number is "7" is changed according to the type of the variable display game being executed (special figure 1 variable display game or special figure 2 variable display game) Therefore, the big hit lighting pattern ("●●●●●●●●") consisting of symbols whose numbers giving different values in the batch display device is "7" can be made common.

  Next, the flow of effects in the case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 in the special view 1 variation display game will be described using FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the fourth modification of the third embodiment.

  A display screen 752 shown in FIG. 101 (1) is a display screen while symbol variation is stopped (during variation display game suspension), and shows a state before the special view 1 variation display game is started. In the display screen 752, the left symbol 709L is stopped at "7", the middle symbol 709C is "3", and the right symbol 709R is stopped at "7". In the display screen 752, the special figure 1 reserve number display 711 shows "3", the special figure 2 reserve number display 712 shows "0", and only the reserve storage which becomes a start opportunity of the special figure 1 variation display game exists. , It will be clearly shown that the special figure 1 variable display game will be played at the time of the next reservation of pending memory.

A display screen 753 shown in FIG. 101 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 752, and shows a state in which the special view 1 variation display game is started.
In the display screen 753, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. In the display screen 753, the special view 1 reservation number display 711 displaying "3" on the display screen 752 displays "2", and the variable display game being executed is the special view 1 variable display game. It is shown that.

A display screen 754 shown in FIG. 101 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 753, and shows a state in which three symbols are temporarily stopped in the special view 1 variable display game.
In the display screen 754, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 ("7"), the middle symbol 709C at the symbol 750 ("7"), and the right symbol 709R at the symbol 750 ("7"). Shows the situation just before

A display screen 755 shown in FIG. 101 (4) is a display screen after the display screen 754, and shows a state in which three symbols are stopped in the special view 1 variable display game.
In the display screen 755, the left symbol 709L is stopped at the symbol 750 ("7"), the middle symbol 709C is stopped at the symbol 750 ("7"), and the right symbol 709R is stopped at the symbol 750 ("7"). A big hit has been derived.

  Next, the flow of effects in the case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 in the special view 2 variation display game will be described using FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the fourth modification of the third embodiment.

  A display screen 756 shown in FIG. 102 (1) is a display screen while symbol variation is stopped (during variation display game suspension), and shows a state before the special view 2 variation display game is started. In the display screen 756, the left symbol 709L is stopped at "7", the middle symbol 709C is "3", and the right symbol 709R is stopped at "7". In the display screen 756, the special figure 1 reserve number display 711 shows "0", the special figure 2 reserve number display 712 shows "3", and only the reserve storage which becomes a start opportunity of the special figure 2 variation display game exists. , It will be clearly shown that the special figure 2 variable display game will be played at the time of the next reservation of pending memory.

A display screen 757 shown in FIG. 102 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 756, and shows a state in which the special view 2 variation display game is started.
On the display screen 757, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. In the display screen 757, the special view 2 reservation number display 712 displaying "3" on the display screen 756 displays "2", and the variation display game being executed is the special view 2 variation display game. It is shown that.

A display screen 758 shown in FIG. 102 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 757 and shows a state in which three symbols are temporarily stopped in the special view 2 variable display game.
In the display screen 758, the left symbol 709L is tentatively stopped at symbol 750 ("7"), middle symbol 709C at symbol 750 ("7") and right symbol 709R at symbol 750 ("7"), and the big hit is derived. Shows the situation just before In addition, while the display screen 758 is displayed, the gaming machine 10 operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R to give a change to the effect, thereby giving the expectation that the further change will occur, and to improve the interest There is.

A display screen 759 shown in FIG. 102 (4) is a display screen after the display screen 758 and shows a state in which three symbols are stopped in the special view 2 variable display game.
In display screen 759, left symbol 709L is changed from symbol 750 to symbol 751, middle symbol 709C is changed from symbol 750 to symbol 751, and right symbol 709R is stopped in the condition replaced from symbol 750 to symbol 751. , The big hit consisting of the symbol 751 is derived.

  The above is the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment. It should be noted that although the decorative symbol B is a symbol used only in the case of deriving a big hit in a special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) generated by winning to the special figure 2 starting opening, Absent. For example, the gaming machine 10 may use the decorative symbol B (symbol 751) in place of the decorative symbol A (symbol 750) even at the time of stopping when the special view 2 variation display game derives the release.

  In the gaming machine 10, it has been described that the big hit consisting of the symbol 750 does not occur in the special view 2 variable display game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the big hit consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game, the gaming machine 10 can also be configured to be able to derive a big hit consisting of the symbol 750.

[Modification 5 of the third embodiment]
Next, a fifth modification of the third embodiment will be described. In the fourth modification of the third embodiment, a special figure 1 variation display game can generate a big hit of low value consisting of the symbol 750, and a special figure 2 variation display game can generate a high value big hit of the symbol 751 The embodiment which is In the fifth modification of the third embodiment, in the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game, it is possible to generate a big hit consisting of a symbol 750 of low value and a big hit consisting of a high value symbol 751. Will be explained.

  First, the symbols used in the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game will be described. FIG. 103 is a view showing a symbol used in the gaming state in the fifth modification of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the gaming machine 10, similar symbols are used in the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game.
In the gaming machine 10, a symbol used in the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game during variation and temporary stop is configured by the decorative symbol A. That is, the gaming machine 10, in the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 are ordered in the left symbol 709L and the right symbol 709R and the middle symbol 709C. To display the temporary stop state by temporarily stopping one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. .

  In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used during the stop of the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are configured by the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B. That is, the gaming machine 10 stops any one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, 751 for the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in the special figure 2 variable display game. Display the result of derivation.

More specifically, when the gaming machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbols 751, the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 are sequentially arranged on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. Perform high-speed fluctuation by displaying, after temporarily stopping one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, the left symbol 709L, right The symbol 751 is stopped by the symbol 709R and the middle symbol 709C.
On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, in the case other than that (when the jackpot consisting of the symbols 751 is not derived), the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 for the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. After making one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 temporarily stop on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, the left symbol is displayed. One of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 is stopped on the 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and the derived result is displayed.

  Next, a case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 and a case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing comparison of two big hits in the fifth modification of the third embodiment.

  First, the big hit consisting of the special figure 1 variation display game and the symbol 750 derived in the special figure 2 variation display game will be described. When the gaming machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbol 750, it gives "4R" as a bonus to the player. The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C from the symbol 750 Derive a big hit.

  Next, the big hit consisting of the special figure 1 variable display game and the symbol 751 derived in the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. When the gaming machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbol 751, it gives "16R" as a bonus to the player. The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then turns the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C to the symbol 751. By replacing, the big hit consisting of the pattern 751 is derived.

  The above is the modification 5 of 3rd Embodiment. As described above, the gaming machine 10 has a value from the state in which the symbol 750 is temporarily stopped in each of the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game (when it is suggested that the big hit of "777" is suggested). By making it possible to generate a big hit of low pattern 750 and a big hit of high value symbol 751, it is possible to increase the variation of the big hit while suppressing an increase in the capacity of the image and the like. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can maintain interest in the player's presentation until the final stage of the presentation (even after temporary stop).

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 is that the big hit consisting of the symbol 751 is a special big hit (high value big hit) by using the decorative symbol B (the symbol with the letter element) only when stopping in the case of leading out the big hit. Can be easily grasped, the understanding of the game can be improved, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification 6 of the third embodiment]
Next, a sixth modification of the third embodiment will be described. In the fourth and fifth modifications of the third embodiment, the embodiment in which the decorative symbol composed only of the numeral element is used at the time of change and at the time of temporary stop has been described. In the sixth modification of the third embodiment, the case of using a graphic including a number element, a character element and the like will be described. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the transition of the symbol aspect of the decorative symbol in the variable display game according to the sixth modification of the third embodiment. In addition, it represents and demonstrates using the symbol which displays "7" here.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the gaming machine 10 uses the character symbol 760 (decorative symbol C) as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R at symbol stopping time (before the start of fluctuation). The decorative symbol C is a character element having a distinctiveness as a symbol by a character (for example, a character like a tiger in the symbol displaying the number "7") and a numerical element having a distinctiveness as a symbol by a number It is a pattern comprised.

  The gaming machine 10 changes the symbol used as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R from the character symbol 760 (decorative symbol C) to the character symbol 761 (decorative symbol D) when the variation of the symbol is started. The decorative symbol D has a base (a fan) having a distinctiveness as a symbol by a pattern (for example, a pattern of a character like a tiger in the symbol displaying the number "7") and a distinctiveness as a symbol by a number It is a pattern configured to include numeric elements.

  And, after the game machine 10 displays the temporary stop state using the character symbol 761 (decorative symbol D) as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R, it is derived in the result derivation display (stop condition) In accordance with the result, the symbols used as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are changed from the decorative symbol D to the decorative symbol C, the decorative symbol A or the decorative symbol B.

  Specifically, the gaming machine 10 changes the symbol from the decorative symbol D to the decorative symbol C as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R when deriving the detachment, and derives the big hit (for example, 4R) The left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are changed from the decorative symbol D to the decorative symbol A, and the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, the right symbol is extracted when a high value big hit (for example, 16R) is derived. The design is changed from decorative design D to decorative design B as 709R.

  According to this, since the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B only at the time of stopping when the big hit is derived, the derivation result can be grasped by the symbol form of the stopping symbol, and the understanding of the game is understood. It is possible to enhance and improve the interest.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10, from the state where temporary stop of the character symbol 761 (decorative symbol D) in the big hit manner (when the decision of the big hit is suggested), from the jackpot consisting of the low value pattern 750 and the high value symbol 751 By making it possible to generate a big hit, it is possible to increase the variation of the big hit while suppressing an increase in the video capacity and the like. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can maintain interest in the player's presentation until the final stage of the presentation (even after temporary stop).

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described third embodiment (including the modification 1 to the modification 6) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41), operation means (push button 25), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The operation means is capable of accepting a predetermined operation. The control means executes a reservation effect (display of the item of the pattern P4 on the notice display 716) for executing a reservation effect (display of the item of the pattern P4 on the notice display 716) for reserving the first operation effect (effect display 722 of the display screen 726) When the effect display 722 of the screen 721 is made executable and the operation of the operation means is accepted while executing the reservation effect and the second operation effect, the second operation effect of the first operation effect and the second operation effect is given priority And run.

  (2) When the control means of (1) is in the process of making a reservation effect and receiving the operation of the operation means at the timing when the second operation effect is not being performed, the received operation is an operation after the start of the first operation effect Accept as a reservation operation to make a reservation.

(3) The control means of (1) changes the mode of the reservation effect while executing the reservation effect and the second operation effect.
(4) The display means of (1) displays the hold storage indicating the right to execute the game, and the control means holds the hold operation when there is a game for which the first operation effect to be reserved is performed in the hold storage. It is displayed on the display means by the reservation effect that the first operation effect is performed in any of the games (display screen 719).

(5) The control means of (4) performs the reservation effect by using the hold storage for executing the game prior to the hold storage for executing the game in which the first operation effect is performed.
(6) The control means of (5) changes the display mode of the hold storage for executing the game earlier in the reservation effect (display screen 719), thereby causing the first operation effect in any of the games in the hold storage. Display on the display means what is to be done.

  (7) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41), operation means (push button 25), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The operation means is capable of accepting a predetermined operation. The control means variably displays the identification information (left symbol 709L, middle symbol 709C, right symbol 709R) in the game, and after displaying the identification information in a variable manner, displays the operation effect accompanied by the operation by the operation means on the display means. After the display mode indicating the operation means is displayed at the position corresponding to the identification information, control is performed to start the operation effect.

  (8) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The control means performs an effect of outputting a sound effect in the game when playing BGM in the game, while the sound effect is being output, the volume of the BGM is muted and the sound volume is output after the sound effect is output. Control to return from the mute state is performed.

  (9) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The control means variably displays the first identification information (decorative symbol A) corresponding to the first value (4R big hit) in the process of deriving the result of the game (at the time of fluctuation / temporary stop), and at the time of deriving the result of the game The second identification information (decorative symbol A) is given a conversion identifier (character element) for converting the first value into a second value (16R big hit) greater than the first value, when stopped. The display means displays a display for stopping and displaying the second identification information (decorative symbol B) corresponding to the value of.

  The above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program is provided which describes the processing content of the function that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have. The above processing functions are realized on the computer by executing the program on the computer. The program in which the processing content is described can be recorded on a computer readable recording medium. Examples of the computer-readable recording medium include a magnetic storage device, an optical disc, a magneto-optical recording medium, a semiconductor memory, and the like. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk drive (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape and the like. The optical disks include a DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), a DVD-RAM, a CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. Magneto-optical recording media include MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

  When the program is distributed, for example, a portable recording medium such as a DVD or a CD-ROM in which the program is recorded is sold. Alternatively, the program may be stored in the storage device of the server computer, and the program may be transferred from the server computer to another computer via a network.

  The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Also, each time a program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network, the computer can sequentially execute processing in accordance with the received program.

  In addition, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or a programmable logic device (PLD).

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of the present invention and to slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

  In addition, the disclosed embodiments are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and modification. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

10 game machine 41 display device 100 game control device 300 effect control device

Claims (1)

Display means for displaying the game;
Operation means capable of receiving a predetermined operation;
While executing a reservation effect for reserving the first operation effect involving the operation of the operation means, the second operation effect involving the operation of the operation means can be executed while the reservation effect and the second operation effect are being executed. A game machine comprising: control means for giving priority to and executing the second operation effect among the first operation effect and the second operation effect when an operation of the operation means is received.

Images